HD Visual Communication System

HD Visual Communication System
4-275-934-18 (1)
HD Visual
Communication
System
Operating Instructions (Version 2.4)
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for
future reference.
PCS-XL55
© 2011 Sony Corporation
Model No. ______________
Serial No. ______________
NOTICE
Each of PCS-XL55 and PCS-RF1 contains
an RF (Radio Frequency) transmitting and
receiving module. Operation is subject to
applicable local radio communication
regulations in each country.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance 20cm
between the radiator & your body. This
transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
WARNING
CAUTION for LAN port
For safety reasons, do not connect the LAN
port to any network devices that might have
excessive voltage.
Owner’s Record
The model and the serial numbers are
located at the rear. Record the serial number
in the space provided below. Refer to these
numbers whenever you call upon your Sony
dealer regarding this product.
To reduce a risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this product
to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing to
qualified personnel only.
IMPORTANT
The nameplate is located on the rear.
WARNING
Use the AC power adapter provided with
this equipment as a power supply source.
Manufacture Type No.
Sony
VGP-AC19V54
Any other power sources may result in
hazards such as a fire.
Disconnect device of this equipment is the
mains plug of the AC adapter.
The mains plug on this equipment must be
used to disconnect mains power.
Please ensure that the socket outlet is
installed near the equipment and shall be
easily accessible.
In the event of abnormal operations,
disconnect the mains plug.
NOTICE
Use the power cord set approved by the
appropriate testing organization for the
specific countries where this unit is to be used.
2
Installing batteries
Two R06 (size AA) batteries are supplied for
Remote Commander.
To avoid risk of explosion, use R06 (size
AA) manganese or alkaline batteries.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
For the customers in the USA
WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
For the customers in the USA
Lamp in this product contains mercury.
Disposal of these materials may be regulated
due to environmental considerations. For
disposal or recycling information, please
contact your local authorities or the
Telecommunications Industry Association
(www.eiae.org).
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
(PCS-XL55/PCS-RF1):
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 20 cm between the
radiator & your body. This transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
This manual focuses on using ISDN lines
to conduct a videoconference, but it also
covers non-ISDN lines. If you use ISDN
lines, consult your Sony dealer for more
information.
• The ISDN service may not be available
in some areas.
If you dispose the unit, consult your nearest
Sony Service Center. The built-in battery
must be treated as a chemical waste.
For the customers in Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IC Interference Statement (PCS-XL55/
PCS-RF1)
This device complies with RSS-210 of the
IC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
(PCS-XL55)
The term “IC:” before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
IC:7424A-ZM100
IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC RSS-102
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance 20 cm
between the radiator & your body.
For the customers in Europe
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku,
Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC
and product safety is Sony Deutschland
GmbH, Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327
Stuttgart, Germany. For any service or
guarantee matters please refer to the
addresses given in separate service or
guarantee documents.
(PCS-XL55/PCS-RF1)
This equipment conforms to R&TTE
Directive 1999/5/EC. For details, please
access the following URL:
http://www.compliance.sony.de
3
For the customers in Europe,
Australia and New Zealand
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment, this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
In the case that interference should occur,
consult your nearest authorized Sony service
facility.
This apparatus shall not be used in the
residential area.
ATTENTION
The electromagnetic fields at the specific
frequencies may influence the picture of this
unit.
For the customers in Taiwan only
For the customers in Europe (PCS-XL55)
Language
Informal DoC
Bulgarian
С настоящето Сони Корпорация декларира, че този PCS-XL55/HD
Visual Communication System о тговаря на основните изисквания и
другите сьответстващи клаузи на Директива 1999/5/EC. Подробности
може да намерите на Интернет страницата :
http://www.compliance.sony.de
/
Czech
Sony Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími
příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti lze získat
na následující URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Danish
Undertegnede Sony Corporation erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
PCS-XL55/HD Visual Communication System overholder de væsentlige krav
og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
For yderligere information gå ind på følgende hjemmeside:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Dutch
Hierbij verklaart Sony Corporation dat het toestel PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Nadere informatie kunt u
vinden op: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
English
Hereby, Sony Corporation, declares that this PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. For details, please access the
following URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Estonian
Sony Corporation kinnitab käesolevaga seadme PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System vastavust 1999/5/EÜ direktiivi põhinõuetele ja
nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Üksikasjalikum info: http://www.compliance.sony.de/.
4
Language
Informal DoC
Finnish
Sony Corporation vakuuttaa täten että PCS-XL55/HD Visual Communication
System tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Halutessasi lisätietoja, käy
osoitteessa: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
French
Par la présente Sony Corporation déclare que l’appareil PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Pour toute information
complémentaire, veuillez consulter l’URL suivante: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
German
Hiermit erklärt Sony Corporation, dass sich das Gerät PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet. Weitere Informationen erhältlich unter: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Με την
Greek
η Sony Corporation δηλώνει τι PCS-XL55/HD Visual
και τις λ
της
1999/5/EK. Για
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Hungarian
Alulírott, Sony Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a(z) PCS-XL55/HD
Visual Communication System megfelel a vonatkozó alapvető
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírá sainak.
További információkat a következő weboldalon találhat:
http://www.compliance.sony.de
/
Italian
Con la presente Sony Corporation dichiara che questo PCS-XL55/ HD Visual
Communication System è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Per ulteriori dettagli,
si prega di consultare il seguente URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Latvian
Lithuanian
Norwegian
Sony Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. For flere detaljer, vennligst se: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Polish
Niniejszym Sony Corporation oswiadcza, .e PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami oraz innymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE. Szczególowe informacje
znalezc mo.na pod nastepujacym adresem URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
5
Language
Informal DoC
Portuguese
Sony Corporation declara que este PCS-XL55/HD Visual Communication
System está conforme os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE. Para mais informacoes, por favor consulte a seguinte URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Romanian
Prin prezenta, Sony Corporation declară că acest PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System respectă cerinţele esenţiale şi este în
conformitate cu prevederile Directivei 1995/5/EC. Pentru detalii, vă
rugăm accesaţi următoarea adresă: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Slovak
Sony Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System splňa základné po žiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti získate na nasledovnej
webovej adrese: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Slovenian
Sony Corporation izjavlja, da je ta PCS-XL55/HD Visual Communication
System v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili
direktive 1999/5/ES. Za podrobnosti vas napro šamo, če pogledate na URL
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Spanish
Por medio de la presente Sony Corporation declara que el PCS-XL55/HD
Visual Communication System cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/
CE. Para mayor información, por favor consulte el siguiente URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Swedish
Härmed intygar Sony Corporation att denna PCS-XL55/HD Visual
Communication System står I ö verensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv
1999/5/EG. För ytterligare information gå in på följande hemsida: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
For the customers in Europe (PCS-RF1)
Language
Informal DoC
Bulgarian
С настоящето Сони Корпорация декларира, че този PCS-RF1/RF
Remote Commander о тговаря на основните изисквания и другите
сьответстващи клаузи на Директива 1999/5/EC. Подробности може да
намерите на Интернет страницата : http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Czech
Sony Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že tento PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti lze získat na následující
URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Danish
Undertegnede Sony Corporation erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr PCS-RF1/
RF Remote Commander overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav
i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
For yderligere information gå ind på følgende hjemmeside:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
6
Language
Informal DoC
Dutch
Hierbij verklaart Sony Corporation dat het toestel PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Nadere informatie kunt u vinden
op: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
English
Hereby, Sony Corporation, declares that this PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. For details, please access the following URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Estonian
Sony Corporation kinnitab käesolevaga seadme PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander vastavust 1999/5/EÜ direktiivi põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele. Üksikasjalikum info:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/.
Finnish
Sony Corporation vakuuttaa täten että PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Halutessasi lisätietoja, käy
osoitteessa: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
French
Par la présente Sony Corporation déclare que l’appareil PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions
pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Pour toute information complémentaire,
veuillez consulter l’URL suivante: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
German
Hiermit erklärt Sony Corporation, dass sich das Gerät PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und
den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Weitere Informationen erhältlich unter: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Greek
τις
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Hungarian
Alulírott, Sony Corporation nyilatkozom, hogy a(z) PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander megfelel a vonatkozó alapvető követelményeknek
és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírá sainak. További információkat a
következő weboldalon találhat: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Italian
Con la presente Sony Corporation dichiara che questo PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Per ulteriori dettagli, si prega di
consultare il seguente URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Latvian
Ar ðo Sony Corporation deklarç, ka PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander
atbilst Direktîvas 1999/5/EK bûtiskajâm prasîbâm un citiem ar to
saistîtajiem noteikumiem. Plaðâka inform âcija ir pieejama:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Lithuanian
Ðiuo Sony Corporation deklaruoja, kad ðis PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas. Susipaþinti su visu atitikties deklaracijos turiniu Jûs galite
interneto tinklalapyje: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
7
Language
Informal DoC
Norwegian
Sony Corporation erklærer herved at utstyret PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF. For flere detaljer, vennligst se: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Polish
Niniejszym Sony Corporation oswiadcza, .e PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander
jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami oraz innymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/WE. Szczególowe informacje znalezc
mo.na pod nastepujacym adresem URL: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Portuguese
Sony Corporation declara que este PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander está
conforme os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Para mais informacoes, por favor consulte a seguinte URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Romanian
Prin prezenta, Sony Corporation declară că acest PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander respectă cerinţele esenţiale şi este în conformitate cu
prevederile Directivei 1995/5/EC. Pentru detalii, vă rugăm accesaţi
următoarea adresă: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Slovak
Sony Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander
splňa základné po žiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES. Podrobnosti získate na nasledovnej webovej adrese:
http://www.compliance.sony.de/
Slovenian
Sony Corporation izjavlja, da je ta PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander v
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES. Za podrobnosti vas napro šamo, če pogledate na URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Spanish
Por medio de la presente Sony Corporation declara que el PCS-RF1/RF Remote
Commander cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Para mayor
información, por favor consulte el siguiente URL: http://
www.compliance.sony.de/
Swedish
Härmed intygar Sony Corporation att denna PCS-RF1/RF Remote Commander
står I ö verensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta
bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. För ytterligare information
gå in på följande hemsida: http://www.compliance.sony.de/
8
Precautions
Operating or storage location
Avoid operating or storing the system in the
following locations:
• Extremely hot or cold places
• Humid or dusty places
• Places exposed to strong vibration
• Close to sources of strong magnetism
• Close to sources of powerful
electromagnetic radiation, such as radios
or TV transmitters
• Noisy places
LCD screen
Notes on use
• Do not expose the LCD screen surface to
the sun. Doing so may damage the screen
surface.
• Do not push or scratch the LCD screen, or
place objects on top of the system. The
image may become uneven or the LCD
panel may be damaged.
• If the system is used in a cold place, a
smear may occur in the picture or the
picture may become dark. This does not
indicate a failure. These phenomena
improve as the temperature rises.
• Ghosting may occur when still pictures are
displayed continuously. It may disappear
after a few moments.
• The screen and cabinet get warm when the
system is in use. This is not a malfunction.
Display pixels
Although the LCD display panel is made
with high-precision technology and has an
effective picture element ratio of over
99.99%, black dots (dead pixels) may appear
on the screen or pixels may become
permanently lit (red, blue, green, etc.) or
unlit. The appearance of dead pixels after
extended periods of use is common among
LCD display panels. Be aware that such
appearances do not represent a malfunction.
Phenomena specific to CMOS
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear
in images are specific to CMOS
(Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor) sensors. They do not
indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CMOS sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CMOS
sensors and is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen
in the following cases:
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the gain (sensitivity)
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot,
they may appear jagged or flicker.
Built-in speakers
The speakers generate magnetism. To avoid
damaging the data, keep magnetic tapes and
disks away from the speakers.
Cleaning
• Before cleaning, disconnect the power
cord from the AC outlet.
• The LCD screen surface is finished with a
special coating. To remove dust from the
screen surface, wipe gently with a soft, dry
cloth.
• Use a soft, dry cloth to gently wipe the
cabinet and panel when cleaning the unit.
For heavier cleaning, use a cloth lightly
moistened with a mild detergent to remove
the dust, and finish by wiping again with a
dry cloth. Do not use volatile solvents such
as alcohol, benzene, thinners, or
insecticides as they may damage the
surface finishes.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage a CMOS image
sensor. You are cautioned that the surface
of a CMOS image sensor should not be
exposed to laser beam radiation in an
environment where a laser beam device is
used.
9
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Using This Manual ................................................................................................. 16
Features .................................................................................................................. 17
System Components .............................................................................................. 19
Basic System Components ............................................................................... 19
Optional Equipment ......................................................................................... 20
System Configuration ............................................................................................ 21
System Configuration via a LAN ..................................................................... 21
System Configuration via an ISDN .................................................................. 22
System Configuration via a SIP ....................................................................... 23
System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint ............................................. 23
System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint .......................................... 24
System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint ........................... 25
System Connections ............................................................................................... 26
System Connection via a LAN ......................................................................... 27
System Connection via an ISDN ...................................................................... 28
System Connection via a SIP ........................................................................... 29
Preparing the System ............................................................................................. 30
Inserting Batteries into the Remote Commander ............................................. 30
Pairing the Remote Commander ...................................................................... 31
Turning the System On/Off ................................................................................... 33
Opening the Lens Cover ................................................................................... 33
Turning On ....................................................................................................... 34
Standby Mode Function ................................................................................... 36
Setting the HD Visual Communication System to Standby Mode .................. 36
Turning Off ...................................................................................................... 37
Adjusting the Volume ...................................................................................... 37
Connecting External Microphones and Headphones ....................................... 37
Using the System as a Computer Display ........................................................ 37
Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation —
Initial Setup Wizard ............................................................................................... 39
Using the Menus .................................................................................................... 42
Identifying the Home Menu ............................................................................. 42
Operation Using the Menu ............................................................................... 49
Entering Characters Using the Remote Commander ....................................... 51
Entering Characters Using the On-Screen Keyboard ....................................... 52
10
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System
Administrators
Registering Local Information ............................................................................... 54
Opening the Setup Menu .................................................................................. 54
Line Interface Setup Menu ............................................................................... 57
Dial Setup Menu ............................................................................................... 57
Answer Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 58
Multipoint Setup Menu .................................................................................... 58
Communication Setup Menu ............................................................................ 59
Audio Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 62
Video Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 65
LAN Setup Menu ............................................................................................. 66
QoS Setup Menu .............................................................................................. 69
TOS Setup Menu .............................................................................................. 70
SIP Setup Menu ................................................................................................ 71
ISDN Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 71
SPID Settings for Customers in the USA and Canada ..................................... 72
Annotation Setup Menu .................................................................................... 73
Camera Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 74
General Setup Menu ......................................................................................... 74
Home Menu Setup Menu ................................................................................. 76
Administrator Setup Menu ............................................................................... 77
Encryption Setup Menu .................................................................................... 82
Shared Phone Book Setup Menu ...................................................................... 82
Displaying the Machine Status .............................................................................. 83
Displaying the Machine Status Menu .............................................................. 83
Machine Information ........................................................................................ 85
Peripheral Status ............................................................................................... 85
Communication Mode Status ........................................................................... 85
LAN Line Status ............................................................................................... 86
Network Routing Check ................................................................................... 86
Restrictions on the Use of IPv6 .............................................................................. 87
Setting Up the Network Configurations ................................................................. 88
LAN Connection via DHCP ............................................................................. 88
LAN Connection through a Router .................................................................. 89
LAN Connection through a Gatekeeper ........................................................... 90
LAN Connection through NAT ........................................................................ 91
LAN Connection with H.460 Firewall Traversal ............................................. 92
LAN Connection Using PPPoE ........................................................................ 94
ISDN Connections ............................................................................................ 95
About the Network Routing Check ........................................................................ 96
11
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party ................................................. 97
Turning On the Power ...................................................................................... 97
Calling a Remote Party by Using the Connect Menu ...................................... 99
Calling a Remote Party by Entering Their Address or Number Directly
(Direct Dial) ........................................................................................ 100
Calling a Remote Party Using the One-Touch Dial Buttons ......................... 101
Calling a Remote Party by Selecting Them in the History List ..................... 102
Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book .................................. 103
Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book ........................... 105
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party ................................................................ 109
Answering Calls (Manual/Auto Answer Mode) ............................................ 109
Answering a Call from a Remote Party ......................................................... 109
Ending the Connection ......................................................................................... 111
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book .......................................................... 112
Registering a New Remote Party ................................................................... 112
Editing the Contents of the Phone Book ........................................................ 115
Copying a Registered Party in the Phone Book ............................................. 116
Deleting the Registered Remote Party ........................................................... 116
Creating a Group in the Phone Book (Group Edit) ........................................ 116
Creating a Private Phone Book ...................................................................... 119
Using the Shared Phone Book ........................................................................ 121
Adjusting the Sound ............................................................................................. 123
Adjusting the Volume of the Received Sound ............................................... 123
Turning Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function .............................. 123
Turning Off the Sound on Answering – Mic on Answer Function ................ 124
Synchronizing Audio and Video – Lip Sync Function .................................. 124
Reducing Echo – Echo Canceller ................................................................... 124
Adjusting the Camera .......................................................................................... 125
Adjusting the Camera Zoom .......................................................................... 125
Adjusting the Brightness ................................................................................ 126
Using the Preset Function .............................................................................. 127
Adjusting the Camera in the Detailed Setup Menu ........................................ 130
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound ................................................................. 132
Switching the Displayed Picture between the Local and Remote Pictures .... 132
Selecting the Input Picture ............................................................................. 132
Selecting the Video Input Using the F1 to F4 (Function) Buttons on the
Remote Commander ........................................................................... 133
Switching the Sound to Be Sent to the Remote Party .................................... 133
Switching Video and Audio at the Same Time .............................................. 133
Switching the Picture from the Remote System ............................................ 134
Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen ..................................... 135
12
Capturing the Screen ............................................................................................ 137
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Using a Tools Menu ............................................................................................. 139
Using the Computer Picture for Presentation ...................................................... 141
Connecting a Computer .................................................................................. 141
Making a Presentation .................................................................................... 142
Streaming a Communication ................................................................................ 144
Recording a Visual Communication .................................................................... 146
Using the Annotation Function ............................................................................ 148
Connecting a Pen Tablet ................................................................................. 148
Using the Annotation Function while in Communication ............................. 149
Using External Microphones and Headphones .................................................... 153
Recording during a Communication .................................................................... 157
Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party ............. 158
Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector ........................ 160
Communicating without the Picture – Voice Meeting ......................................... 162
Controlling the Remote System with the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission ... 163
Accessing the Communication System ................................................................ 164
Using a Web Browser ..................................................................................... 164
Using Telnet ................................................................................................... 164
Using SSH ...................................................................................................... 164
Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection
Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN ................................................ 166
Starting an Encrypted Connection ....................................................................... 168
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection .............................................. 171
Using the LAN Connection (Up to 3 Points) ................................................. 171
Using the ISDN Connection ........................................................................... 172
Using Both LAN and ISDN ........................................................................... 173
Configuring Multipoint ........................................................................................ 174
Setting Up Multipoint ..................................................................................... 174
Registering the Remote Parties in the Multipoint Connection List ............... 174
Starting a Multipoint Connection ......................................................................... 178
Calling Remote Parties ................................................................................... 178
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party ........................................................... 182
13
Using the Display Control ................................................................................... 183
Broadcast Mode ............................................................................................. 183
Broadcast Modes and Displayed Windows .................................................... 185
Switching the Broadcast Mode ...................................................................... 186
Receiving the Broadcast Requested From Another Terminal ........................ 187
Ending the Multipoint Connection ...................................................................... 188
Notes on Secondary Terminals ............................................................................ 189
Multipoint Attributes ........................................................................................... 190
Chapter 7: Computer Display Function
Computer Display Function ................................................................................. 193
Connecting the Computer .............................................................................. 193
Displaying the Computer Picture ................................................................... 193
Outputting the Computer Audio ..................................................................... 194
Switching between Videoconference and Computer Pictures ............................. 195
Two-Picture Display ...................................................................................... 195
Automatic Switching from the Computer Picture .......................................... 195
Starting a Videoconference during Computer Display ........................................ 196
Calling a Remote Party during Computer Display ........................................ 196
Receiving a Call during Computer or Two-Picture Display .......................... 196
Adjusting the Picture Quality of the Display ....................................................... 197
Picture menu ................................................................................................... 198
Screen menu ................................................................................................... 198
Setup menu ..................................................................................................... 199
Information menu ........................................................................................... 200
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
Opening the Web Page ........................................................................................ 202
Identifying a User ................................................................................................ 203
Selecting a Menu ................................................................................................. 205
How to Use [Home] Menu ................................................................................... 206
How to Use [Download] Menu ............................................................................ 207
How to Use [Remote Commander] Menu ........................................................... 208
Selecting a Tool ................................................................................................... 209
How To Configure KIOSK Mode .................................................................. 210
How to Use [Version Up] Page ........................................................................... 211
How to Use [Streaming] Page ............................................................................. 212
How to Use [Monitor] Page ................................................................................. 213
14
Appendix
Location and Function of Parts and Controls ....................................................... 214
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System ............................................ 214
PCS-RF1 RF Remote Commander (Supplied) ............................................... 216
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit (Optional) .............................................................. 217
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit (Optional) .............................................................. 218
Indicators .............................................................................................................. 219
On-Screen Messages ............................................................................................ 222
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 224
Specifications ....................................................................................................... 227
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System ............................................ 227
PCS-RF1 Remote Commander (Supplied) .................................................... 228
VGP-AC19V54 AC Adaptor .......................................................................... 228
PCS-A1 Microphone (Optional) .................................................................... 228
PCSA-A3 Microphone (Optional) .................................................................. 228
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit (Optional) .............................................................. 229
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit (Optional) .............................................................. 229
Acceptable RGB Input/Output Signals .......................................................... 231
Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 233
Pin Assignments on Optional Board Connectors ........................................... 234
Screen Size during Two-Picture Display ....................................................... 235
Display Switching Controls ................................................................................. 236
Layout Controls during Videoconference Display ......................................... 236
Layout Controls between Videoconference and Computer Picture
Displays ............................................................................................... 239
Layout Control Examples ............................................................................... 239
List of Port Numbers Used on the PCS-XL55 ..................................................... 241
Videoconferencing Room Layout ........................................................................ 242
“Memory Stick” Media ........................................................................................ 243
Phenomena Specific to CMOS Image Sensors .................................................... 244
Glossary ............................................................................................................... 245
Menu Configuration ............................................................................................. 248
“IPELA” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
15
Chapter 1:
Installation and
Preparation
Using This Manual
The chapters cover the following contents;
please read the chapters that may be required
for your type of communication.
Chapter 1: Installation and
Preparation
This chapter guides you through the system
configuration and information required to
use your HD Visual Communication System
for the first time. It shows you how to install
and connect your Communication System,
to turn the system on/off and how to access
basic on-screen menus.
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for
System Administrators
This chapter describes how to register and
set up all the necessary items for system
administrators, using the on-screen menus.
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
This chapter guides you through the basic
operations and settings for connecting to a
remote party. You will learn how to start
connection to finish it. It is recommended
that this chapter be read by participants in a
communication.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional
Equipment
This chapter shows advanced
communication using the optional
equipment, and functions such as streaming,
recording, presentation and annotation.
Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection
This chapter shows how to connect to a
remote party using an encrypted video and
16
Using This Manual
audio data, and encrypted data from a
computer.
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
This chapter shows you how to connect your
system to multiple sites.
Chapter 7: Computer Display
Function
This chapter describes how to use the system
as a computer display.
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
This chapter shows you how to control the
Visual Communication System or set it up
via a Web browser.
Appendix
The appendix contains descriptions of the
controls and connectors on the components
of the HD Visual Communication System,
troubleshooting list, specifications, and a
glossary.
Features
Portable integrated HD Visual
Communication System
This Communication System integrates a
21.6-inch wide-format display, a camera
equipped with digital zoom, a codec, a
microphone, and speakers into a portable allin-one visual communication system.
Supports ITU-T international
standard
The Communication System complies with
ITU-T Recommendations defined by WTSC
for easy connection with remote parties
overseas.
ITU: International Telecommunication
Union
WTSC: World Telecommunications
Standardization Committee
Transmission and reception of
high-definition images enabled
The Communication System supports the
H.264 Baseline Profile and High Profile
high-definition video compression format,
enabling transmission and reception of
interlaced video signals with a high
resolution of 1920 × 1080 or 1280 × 720 by
a maximum of 60 frames per second.
Transmission and reception of
wide range of stereo sound
capability
The audio compression format of the
Communication System supports MPEG4
AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) stereo
sound and 22 kHz monaural sound, allowing
high-quality audio transmission and
Supports data communication
The Communication System supports
transmission of output data from a computer.
High transmission speeds and
high-quality picture capability
The Communication System accepts a LAN
communication bit rate of up to 4 Mbps. It
also allows you to connect to as many as
three ISDN lines and use 6B channels with
the optional PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit, and
as many as six ISDN lines and use 12B
channels with the optional PCSA-B768S
ISDN Unit.
Wide range of video/audio
compression format selectable
The Communication System supports the
H.264, H.263+, H.261 and MPEG4* video
compression formats. It also supports the
MPEG4 AAC**, G.722, G.728, and G.711
audio compression formats.
* Supports MPEG4 only for connection using
SIP.
** Supports MPEG4 AAC only for IP and
ISDN connection.
Annotation capability
The annotation function allows you to write
letters or graphics on the screen or point with
a pointer during communication using the
optional pen tablet.
RF (Radio Frequency) Remote
Commander adopted
The supplied Remote Commander controls
the Communication System using the radio
frequency of 2.4 GHz. The Remote
Commander can be paired with the System
to prevent interference from other Systems
and Camera Units.
Features
17
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
The PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication
System is a communication system that
provides face-to-face communications with
a remote party by transmitting and receiving
images and sound via LAN (Local Area
Network) or ISDN (Integrated Services
Digital Network) connections.
reception. The built-in echo canceller
supports up to 16 kHz.
On-screen keyboard
Supports encrypted connection
The on-screen keyboard displayed on the
monitor screen allows you to input a
number, address, etc. without moving your
eyes away from the screen.
The system allows you to make a strictly
confidential connection using standard
encryption, which complies with the H.233,
H.234 and H.235 standardized by the ITU-T.
QoS (Quality of Service) function
for optimization of bandwidth and
traffic packet through network
Supports multipoint connection
The Communication System includes the
“Packet Resend Request”, “Adaptive Rate
Control”, and “Forward Error Correction”
functions. Depending on the network status,
these functions are used in Hybrid to
guarantee consistent, high-quality
communications.
The Communication System allows
connection among multiple points via a
LAN and/or ISDN line.
Computer display functionality
Compact size
The monitor of the Communication System
can be used as a computer display.
When you are using the system as a
computer display, the display will
automatically change and inform you when
a call is received from a remote site.
The compact size of the Communication
System allows versatile installation layout.
Supports KIOSK mode
Equipped with a Memory Stick slot
You can simplify operations and make
calling with one-touch dial the only
available operation.
The Communication System is equipped
with a Memory Stick slot, allowing you to
save still images, create the Private Phone
Book and store the customized settings in a
“Memory Stick”.
Video and audio recording
Video and audio can be recorded in a
“Memory Stick” and can be watched on a
computer after.
Streaming
You can broadcast streaming video and
audio. This allows people who cannot attend
the communication to watch the proceedings
over the Web using a computer. You can
also select whether to broadcast both video
and audio or audio only.
Supports a connection using SIP
The Communication System allows
connection to a remote party with an IP phone,
etc. using SIP (Session Initiation Protocol).
18
Features
System Components
The PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System is composed of basic
system components for a basic communication, and optional equipment for an
enhanced communication.
Components packaged in the PCS-XL55
Description
Contains the camera, monitor, video codec, audio
codec, echo canceller, network interfaces and system
controller.
PCS-RF1
Remote Commander
Used to control the HD Visual Communication
System. Before using, pairing with the
Communication System is required.
F1
Unit
PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System
F2
/
F3
F4
T
W
VGP-AC19V54 AC adaptor
Supplies power to the Communication System.
System Components
19
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Basic System Components
Optional Equipment
Optional equipment especially designed for use with the Communication
System
The following optional devices are used to enhance your videoconference.
20
Unit
Description
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit
Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to three ISDN
lines; 6B channels usable.
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit
Used to connect to an ISDN line. Up to six ISDN
lines; 12B channels usable.
PCS-A1 Microphone
Omni-directional microphone that picks up sound
relatively from all directions, allowing participants to
speak from any location. It is recommended to use in
a quiet situation.
PCSA-A3 Microphone
Unidirectional microphone. It is recommended when
you want to pick up the voice of a speaker directed
toward the microphone.
System Components
System Configuration
System Configuration via a LAN
This allows you to:
• Have a point-to-point HD visual communication over LAN.
• Pick up sound in stereo by using two microphones connected to the system.
System configuration
1 PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication
System
2 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander
/
T
W
System Configuration
21
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
The PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System has various system
configuration capabilities using the basic components and optional equipment.
This section describes the capabilities and necessary equipment for some
typical configuration examples.
System Configuration via an ISDN
Connection to ISDN is required to use the PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S
ISDN Unit especially designed for use with this system.
This allows you to:
• Have a point-to-point HD visual communication over ISDN.
• Pick up sound in stereo by using two microphones connected to the system.
• Hold an HD visual communication with high speeds and highest quality
image transmission by connecting up to three ISDN lines (when using the
PCSA-B384S) or by connecting up to six ISDN lines (when using the PCSAB768S).
System configuration
1 PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System
2 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander
3 PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S
ISDN Unit (not supplied)
This diagram depicts a system
configuration using the PCSA-B768S
ISDN Unit.
/
F1
F2
F3
F4
T
W
PCS-RF1
RF
About the number of ISDN lines and B (bearer) channels
Up to three ISDN lines (6B channels) with the PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit or up
to six ISDN lines (12B channels) with the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit can be
connected to one Communication System. The more channels you use for a
single communication, the faster speeds and higher-quality picture you can
obtain for your network communication.
Note
When connecting to the ISDN Unit, Use the ports in ascending order.
Yes: 1, 2, 3…
No: 1, 6, 5…
22
System Configuration
System Configuration via a SIP
This allows you to:
• Have an HD visual communication with an IP telephone, etc. using SIP.
• Pick up sound in stereo by using two microphones connected to the system.
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
System configuration
1 PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System
2 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander
3 SIP server
4 IP telephone, etc.
/
T
W
System Configuration via a LAN for Multipoint
This allows you to:
Have a multipoint HD visual communication among up to 3 sites over LAN.
System configuration
1 PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication
System
2 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander
/
T
W
System Configuration
23
System Configuration via an ISDN for Multipoint
To enable ISDN connection, you need to connect the optional PCSA-B384S
or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit especially designed for use with this system.
This allows you to:
Have a multipoint HD visual communication among up to 3 sites over ISDN.
System configuration
/
T
W
This diagram depicts a
system configuration using
the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.
1 PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System
2 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander
3 PCSA-B384S (not supplied) or PCSA-B768S (not supplied) ISDN Unit
24
System Configuration
System Configuration via a LAN and ISDN for Multipoint
You can connect to up to 3 sites via mixed LAN and ISDN lines.
System configuration
/
T
W
This diagram depicts a system
configuration using the PCSAB768S ISDN Unit.
1 PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System
2 PCS-RF1 Remote Commander
3 PCSA-B384S (not supplied) or PCSA-B768S (not supplied) ISDN Unit
System Configuration
25
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
This allows you to:
Have a multipoint HD visual communication among up to 3 sites over LAN
and ISDN.
System Connections
This section describes the typical system connections.
Notes
• Be sure to turn off all the equipment before making any connections.
• Do not connect/disconnect the interface cable or pen tablet with the power on. Doing so
may damage the Communication System or ISDN Unit.
• For safety, do not connect the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector to a network that
applies excess voltage via the 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T connector.
• When used with the ISDN Unit for the first time, the Communication System may
automatically upgrade the software of the connected equipment. Upgrade the
software according to the message displayed on the monitor screen. Be sure not to
turn off the Communication System or disconnect the cable during upgrading.
Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction of the system.
26
System Connections
System Connection via a LAN
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
L R
REC
OUT
to LAN
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
UTP cable
(category 5, straight)2)
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
to
AUX CONTROL
19.5V
!
to DC19.5V
Power cord1)
AC adaptor1)
to a wall outlet
1) Supplied
2) Not supplied
Note
The REC OUT jack is used to make an audio recording of a communication. This is not
used during regular communication.
System Connections
27
System Connection via an ISDN
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System
ISDN Unit2)
to TERMINAL
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit2)
RGB IN
Interface
cable
(supplied
with ISDN
Unit)
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
to ISDN 1-3
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit2)
to ISDN 1-6
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
to ISDN
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
to ISDN UNIT
ISDN modular cable2)
to
DC19.5V
1) Supplied
2) Not supplied
Power cord1)
AC adaptor1)
to a wall outlet
Note
The REC OUT jack is used to make an audio recording of a communication. This is not
used during regular conferences.
28
System Connections
System Connection via a SIP
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
to LAN
connector
to LAN
connector
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
UTP cable
(category 5,
straight)2)
to LAN
connector
IP telephone,
etc.
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
to
AUX CONTROL
19.5V
!
to DC19.5V
AC adaptor1)
Power cord1)
1) Supplied
2) Not supplied
to a wall outlet
Note
The REC OUT jack is used to make an audio recording of a communication. This is not
used during regular communication.
System Connections
29
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
SIP server
Preparing the System
Inserting Batteries into the Remote Commander
Most of the operations with the HD Visual Communication System can be
controlled with the supplied Remote Commander.
1
Remove the battery compartment cover.
2
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries (supplied) with correct polarities into the
battery compartment.
3
Replace the cover.
Note
Be sure to insert the batteries E side first. Inserting them forcibly e side first may
damage the insulated film covering the batteries and cause a short circuit.
Battery life
When the batteries are exhausted, the LED indicator does not light if you press
any button and the Remote Commander does not function properly. Replace
both batteries with new ones.
Notes on batteries
To avoid damage from possible battery leakage or corrosion, observe the
following:
• Make sure to insert the batteries with the polarities in the correct direction.
• Do not mix old and new batteries, or different types of batteries.
• Do not attempt to charge the batteries.
• If you do not intend to use the Remote Commander for a long period of time,
remove the batteries.
30
Preparing the System
• If battery leakage occurs, clean the battery compartment and replace all the
batteries with new ones.
Pairing the Remote Commander
Note
When performing the pairing procedure, be sure to turn off other HD Visual
Communication Systems located nearby that are not targets for pairing. If multiple
devices are turned on, the Remote Commander might pair device other than the target one.
To pair the Communication System with the Remote Commander again
1
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
/
F1
F2
F3
F4
LED
indicator
LAYOUT VIDEO INPUT CAMERA
VOLUME
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
ZOOM
T
ENTER
CONNECT
TOOLS
?/1 (power) indicator
19.5V
RETURN
!
W
AUX CONTROL
3
2
RGB OUT
PRESENTATION
BACK
SPACE DISCONNECT
1
2 ABC
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7PQRS
8 TUV
9WXYZ
TONE
3 DEF
DOT
0
ON/OFF
MIC
1
Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.
The ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System flashes.
“Starting” appears on the bottom right of the monitor, and then the IPELA
logo appears.
When the system has finished starting up, the indicator remains steadily lit
in green.
Preparing the System
31
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
The supplied Remote Commander controls the HD Visual Communication
System using the radio frequency of 2.4 GHz. The Remote Commander and
the Communication System are paired to prevent interference from other
Remote Commanders and Systems.
Pairing between the Remote Commander and the Communication System is
programmed at the factory.
2
Within three minutes after the power is on, locate the Remote Commander
closer to the Communication System, and press the RETURN and TOOLS
buttons at the same time.
The LED indicator flashes rapidly.
3
Press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
If the LED indicator flashes more slowly, pairing between the units has
succeeded.
When pairing has failed
The LED indicator on the Remote Commander continues flashing rapidly. In
this case, press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander again.
To cancel pairing
Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System.
Notes
• When the LED indicator does not flash even if you press any button on the Remote
Commander, the batteries might be exhausted. Replace both batteries with new ones.
• Once pairing is established between the units, it will not be erased even if the batteries
are replaced.
• Operable distance is 10 m (32.8 ft.). Depending on the circumstances, a longer
operable distance may be possible.
32
Preparing the System
Turning the System On/Off
This section describes how to turn on or off the Communication System.
The system is equipped with a lens cover to hide the camera. Before starting a
videoconference, open the lens cover by sliding the lever for lens cover on the
top of the system to the right. If the lens cover is closed, the picture on the local
site will not be seen on the remote site.
Lever for lens cover
Camera
Turning the System On/Off
33
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Opening the Lens Cover
Turning On
1
Turn on any external equipment that will be used.
2
Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.
?/1 (power) switch
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
?/1 (power) indicator
The ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System flashes.
“Starting” appears on the bottom right of the monitor, and then the IPELA
logo appears.
When the system has finished starting up, the indicator remains steadily lit
in green.
The Home menu will appear on the monitor screen and the picture shot by
the local camera will also appear in the Home menu.
Home menu
AAA
Ready
Ready to connect.
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
5/11/2008 13:00
Home
Camera
Connect
When the lens cover is closed, the Home menu appears as follows.
AAA
Ready
Ready to connect.
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Home
Closed
Camera
Connect
34
Turning the System On/Off
5/11/2008 13:00
When the camera is turned off, the Home menu appears as follows.
AAA
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Ready
Ready to connect.
5/11/2008 13:00
Home
Connect
Notes
• If a conference is conducted with the lens cover closed, only a black screen will be
visible to the remote party.
• If no communication exists and Remote Commander operations are not performed for
10 minutes, the camera will be turned off automatically.
• If Remote Commander operations are performed while the camera is turned off, the
camera will turn on.
For details on the Home menu, see “Identifying the Home Menu” on page 42.
Notes
• When you turn on the power of the Communication System for the first time after
installation, the setup wizard will appear after the self-diagnosis is completed. Set up
your system following the wizard.
For setups using the wizard, see “Setting Up the System Immediately after
the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard” on page 39.
• When used with an optional device especially designed for use with this system, such
as the ISDN Unit, for the first time, the Communication System may automatically
upgrade the software of the connected device. Upgrade the software according to the
message displayed on the monitor screen. Be sure not to turn off the Communication
System or disconnect the cable during upgrading. Otherwise, it may cause a
malfunction of the system. System malfunction may also occur when a system poweroff has been caused by an accidental problem such as a power interruption during
upgrading. If connection of the ISDN Unit or other devices to the Communication
System is not re-established even after the system power is recovered, consult a Sony
dealer.
• You can check the versions of the Communication System, optional dedicated
equipment connected and the application software installed using the Machine Status
menu.
For details on the Machine Status menu, see page 83.
Turning the System On/Off
35
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Camera
Standby Mode Function
To save power, the Communication System will enter standby mode if you do
not operate it for a specified period of time. When the Communication System
is in standby mode, the ?/1 indicator lights in orange.
You can turn on the Communication System with any button on the Remote
Commander if the System is in standby mode.
Once the Communication System receives a call, the standby mode is
automatically released.
Setting the HD Visual Communication System to Standby Mode
1
Display the Home menu on the monitor screen, then press the @/1 button
on the Remote Commander.
The message “Power off?” appears on the monitor screen.
2
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select OK, then
press the ENTER button.
You may press the @/1 button on the Remote Commander.
The Communication System enters standby mode and the @/1 indicator on
the Communication System lights in orange.
To cancel setting the system to standby
Select “Cancel” with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, then
press the ENTER button in step 2 above.
To release the standby mode
Press any button on the Remote Commander.
To specify the standby time
Specify the time that you want the system to remain on before entering into
standby mode (1 to 99 minutes) by setting “Standby Time” of the Device Setup
page of the General setup menu. If you do not want the system to enter the
standby mode, set “Standby Mode” to “Off”.
For the settings, see “Standby Time” and “Standby Mode” in the General
setup menu on page 74.
36
Turning the System On/Off
Turning Off
1
Press the @/1 (power) switch on the Communication System.
The message “Power off?” appears on the monitor screen.
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Power
off”, and press the ENTER button.
You can power off the system by pressing the @/1 (power) button on the
Remote Commander.
The system turns off.
3
Turn off the power of other equipment used for the communication.
Notes
• Turn off the power switch on the Communication System when the system will not
be used for an extended period. While the power switch is off, you cannot receive a
call from a remote party.
• Be sure to unplug the power cord after the power of the system is turned off
completely.
• If the system is unplugged for about 10 days or longer, the clock setting of the system
may be reset. In this case, re-set the date and time in the Clock Set page of the General
setup menu.
Adjusting the Volume
1
Press the VOLUME +/- buttons on the Remote Commander to set the
volume to a level where the remote party can be clearly heard.
11
Connecting External Microphones and Headphones
You can connect an external microphone and headphones for use with the
Communication System.
For details on using external microphones and headphones, see “Using
External Microphones and Headphones” on page 153.
Using the System as a Computer Display
When connected to a computer, the Communication System can be used as a
computer display.
Connect the computer to the RGB IN connector, and press the PC/RGB button
on the right side of the system to enable use as a computer display.
Turning the System On/Off
37
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
2
You can also press the PC/RGB button and VC button to switch between
videoconference display, two-picture display with the videoconference picture
as the main picture, and two-picture display with the computer picture as the
main picture.
For details on using the system as a computer display, see “Chapter 7:
Computer Display Function”.
38
Turning the System On/Off
When you turn on the Communication System for the first time after
installation and the self-diagnosis is completed, the setup wizard appears on
the monitor screen. Register your local system data with the setup wizard using
the Remote Commander.
Notes
• You can change the settings made with the setup wizard later using the setup menus.
• The setup wizard will also be displayed when you install the PCSA-B384S or PCSAB768S ISDN Unit to your system later. Perform the setup again.
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
Wizard
Home
Select Language
English
Set Region and Clock
2007.11.29 14:21
Select Line I/F
IP
Set up LAN
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Back to Tools
Set up ISDN
Set up SIP
To select the on-screen language
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Select
Language” in the setup wizard, then press the ENTER button.
IP:192.168.0.11
Wizard
5/11/2008 13:00
Select Language
Select Language
Select the on-screen language.
English
Save
Cancel
Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard
39
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Setting Up the System Immediately
after the Installation — Initial Setup
Wizard
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
language to be used for the on-screen menus and messages.
Select from among English, French, German, Japanese, Spanish, Italian,
Simplified Chinese, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic, Thai, Turkish,
Norwegian, Welsh, Czech and Hungarian.
Note
Menu displays may be in English for some languages.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The setup wizard is restored.
To set the region and clock
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Set
Region and Clock” in the setup wizard, then press the ENTER button.
2
Set the region and clock items.
Wizard
Set Region and Clock
Select the region
Set Region and Clock
Select the display pattern Year/Month/Day
Enter the year
Enter the month
Enter the day
Enter the time
Save
Cancel
Select the region: Select the country or region where the system is used.
Select the display pattern: Select the display pattern of year, month and
day.
Enter the year, Enter the month, Enter the day, Enter the time: Enter
the date and time using the number buttons on the Remote
Commander.
For the procedure to enter the numbers using the Remote Commander, see
“Entering Characters Using the Remote Commander” on page 51.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The setup wizard is restored.
40
Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard
To select the line interface
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Select
Line I/F” in the setup wizard, then press the ENTER button.
2
Select the line interface to be used.
Wizard
Select Line I/F
Which is your Line I/F? (Multiple selection available)
Select Line I/F
IP
ISDN
SIP
Which is your primary Line I/F?
IP
ISDN
Save
SIP
Cancel
Which is your Line I/F?: Select from among IP, ISDN and SIP.
Which is your primary Line I/F?: If you select two or more interfaces
with “Which is your Line I/F?”, select the interface you most use.
Select from among IP, ISDN and SIP.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The setup wizard appears.
To set up a LAN connection
Select “Set up LAN” in the setup wizard, then set up a LAN connection.
To set up an ISDN line
Select “Set up ISDN” in the setup wizard, then set up an ISDN line connection.
To set up a SIP
Select “Set up SIP” in the setup wizard, then set up a SIP connection.
Setting Up the System Immediately after the Installation — Initial Setup Wizard
41
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
1
Using the Menus
The HD Visual Communication System uses the on-screen menus to make
various adjustments and settings. This section explains how to adjust or set the
items in the menus and gives a brief introduction to the menus.
Identifying the Home Menu
The Home menu is displayed on the monitor screen when the system is
turned on and has not been connected to a remote party. The Home menu
displays the image shot by the local camera, local system name, current date
and time and buttons to open the menus.
You can select the items shown in the Home menu using the Home Menu1 to
Home Menu3 pages in the Home Menu setup menu.
The descriptions of the items displayed in the Home menu are given below
using the default menu and the menu with all items shown, as the examples.
Home menu (default)
12
AAA
3
5 6
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Ready
Ready
Home
7
qa
Camera
Connect
IP
Dial
qd
42
Using the Menus
5/11/2008 13:00
Home menu (with all items shown)
12
3
AAA
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
4
5 6
IPv6:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX
5/11/2008 13:00
Prêt
Accueil
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
NEAR
qk
7
8
9
0
qs
Caméra
Outils
Historique
F1
F2
Room 101
F3
Room 201
Office A
F4
Office E
Annuaire
Appel détaillé
qd
IP
Appel
qf
qg
qh qj
1 Background screen
Image shot by the camera is displayed.
B Local terminal name
The local terminal name set in the menu is displayed.
C IP address of the local system
The IP address of the local system is shown.
When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4/IPv6” in the Administrator setup
menu, the IPv6 IP address is also displayed.
Note
The first set of digits is not displayed for IPv6 IP addresses.
By changing the “Number Display” setting (page 76) on the Home Menu1
page of the Home Menu setup menu, you can display the gatekeeper’s user
name and user number, NAT address, etc. instead of the IP address.
D ISDN line number
The ISDN line number of the local system is shown.
E Local system status
The status on the local terminal is shown.
F Date and time
The current date and clock are displayed.
G Camera button
The Camera menu opens when you select the button and press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
Using the Menus
43
The Camera menu is used to adjust the camera brightness, or to preset the
camera adjustments and to move the camera to the preset position.
Camera menu
5/11/2008 13:00
Camera
Previous
Adjustments
Brightness
Preset
Details
For details on the Camera menu, see page 125.
H Tools button
The Tools menu opens when you select the button and press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
The menu is used to carry out presentation, streaming, recording,
annotation, etc. The Machine Status menu or Setup menus can be displayed
using the buttons in the Tools menu.
Tools menu
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
For details on the Tools menu, see page 139.
For details on the Machine Status menu, see page 83.
For details on the Setup menu, see page 54.
I History button
The History menu opens when you select the button and press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
The menu is used to check the incoming call and outgoing call histories or
to call a remote party from the history list.
44
Using the Menus
History menu
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
History
Home
Dial
Dial History1
111.111.111.112
Answer
Dial History2
555-555-555
2008/05/26 00:00 (03:25:45)
Missed Call
Dial History3
17.17.17.17
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:17)
Dial History4
18.18.18.18
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:18)
Dial History5
19.19.19.19
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:19)
Dial History6
20.20.20.20
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:20)
Dial History7
66.66.66.66
2008/05/26 00:08 (00:00:00)
Dial History8
88.88.88.88
2008/05/26 00:08 (01:00:06)
Detailed Dial
For details on the History menu, see page 102.
J Phone Book button
The Phone Book opens when you select the button and press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
The menu is used to register a remote party to the Phone Book or to call a
remote party registered in the Phone Book.
Phone Book
Phone Book
Home
Default Group
Group1
Group2
Room 101
Room 102
Office A
Group3
ISDN 01-2345-6789
IP 255.255.255.255
ISDN 98-7654-3210
Room 201
Room 202
Office E
IP 0.0.0.0
IP 123.456.789.012
ISDN 01-2345-6789
New Entry
Group4
Group Edit
Group5
Group6
Group7
History
Group8
Detailed Dial
Group9
For details on the Phone Book, see page 112.
K Connect button
The Connect menu opens when you select “Connect” in the Home menu
and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
The Connect menu is used to call a remote party.
Using the Menus
45
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Phone Book
2008/05/01 00:00 (12:34:56)
Connect menu
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
Previous
Enter Number/Address
Select from Phone Book
Connect
Select from History
For details, see “Calling a Remote Party by Using the Connect Menu” on
page 99.
L Detailed Dial button
The Detailed Dial menu opens when you select the Detailed Dial button
and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
The menu is used to call a remote party by setting the details of the dial
setup options.
Detailed Dial menu
Detailed Dial
Home
Dial to:
Number of Connected Sites 1
Line I/F
IP
Communication
Bit Rate
1024kbps
Number of Lines
1B (64K)
Phone Book
History
Cancel
For details on the Detailed Dial menu, see page 105.
M Instruction display
The instructions for the operation in the Home menu are displayed.
N Line interface select button
Selecting the button opens the drop-down list of the line interface. Select
the interface to be used, then press the ENTER button.
O Number input box
To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book, select the box and
enter the party’s IP address, Domain name, ISDN line number, etc.
46
Using the Menus
P Dial button
To call a remote party whose number or address has been entered in the
number input box, select this button, then press the ENTER button on the
Remote Commander.
R Display
1
2
3
4
5
Home
6
NEAR
7
8
1 Video input
The selected video input on the local system is displayed.
The displayed video input is shown as the label set in “Custom Input
Label” in the Video setup menu.
2 Audio input
The selected audio input on the local system is displayed.
3 LAN status
The current status of LAN connection is shown. The LAN indicator is
shown in white when LAN is enabled for use and in gray when it is
disabled.
4 ISDN status
The current status of the ISDN unit ports is shown. The port indicator is
shown in white when it is enabled for use and in gray when it is disabled.
5 Indicators
The status indicators for when the microphone is off, a “Memory Stick” is
inserted, a pen tablet is connected, streaming broadcast is being executed,
recording is being executed, etc. are displayed.
6 Audio level meter
The current audio input level is displayed.
Using the Menus
47
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Q One-touch dial buttons
The submenu is displayed when you select a thumbnail for a remote party
you want to call and press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
Using the submenu you can call the remote party.
You can also call the remote parties assigned to the one-touch buttons by
pressing the F1 to F4 buttons on the Remote Commander.
7 Volume
The volume-level bar is temporarily shown when you adjust the volume of
the Communication System.
8 Warning messages
If system malfunction occurs, a warning, instruction, etc. are displayed.
48
Using the Menus
Operation Using the Menu
The basic operation through the menu is explained taking manual brightness
adjustment in the Camera menu as an example.
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Buttons used for menu operations
PRESENTATION
/
F1
F2
F3
F4
LAYOUT VIDEO INPUT CAMERA
VOLUME
V/v/B/b buttons
ZOOM
T
ENTER
ENTER button
W
RETURN button
RETURN
CONNECT
TOOLS
BACK
SPACE DISCONNECT
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
8 TUV
9WXYZ
7PQRS
TONE
Number buttons
DOT
DOT button
0
ON/OFF
MIC
PCS-RF1
RF
1
Display the Home menu.
AAA
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Ready
Ready to connect.
5/11/2008 13:00
Home
Camera
Connect
Using the Menus
49
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Camera”,
then press the ENTER button.
The Camera menu appears.
5/11/2008 13:00
Previous
Adjustments
Brightness
Camera
Preset
Details
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Brightness”, then press the ENTER button.
The Brightness menu appears.
5/11/2008 13:00
Adjustments > Brightness
Manual Adjustment
Previous
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
brightness adjustment bar, then press the ENTER button.
5
Use the V, v, B or b button to adjust the brightness of the image, then press
the ENTER button.
6
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Previous”, then press the ENTER button after the adjustment is finished.
You can also use the RETURN button on the Remote Commander.
The Brightness menu is restored.
7
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Previous”, then press the ENTER button. You can also use the RETURN
button on the Remote Commander.
The Camera menu is restored.
50
Using the Menus
When the “Save” button is displayed in the menu
When the setting or adjustment is finished, press the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Save” and press the ENTER button. The setting
or adjusted value becomes effective.
Entering Characters Using the Remote Commander
This section explains how to enter the letters, numbers or symbols in the text
box in the menu using the Remote Commander.
PRESENTATION
/
F1
F2
F3
F4
LAYOUT VIDEO INPUT CAMERA
VOLUME
F1 button
F2 button
F3 button
ZOOM
T
b button
ENTER
W
RETURN
CONNECT
TOOLS
BACK
SPACE DISCONNECT
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7PQRS
8 TUV
9WXYZ
TONE
BACK SPACE button
Number buttons
DOT
0
DOT button
ON/OFF
MIC
PCS-RF1
RF
To enter letters or numbers
1
Press the F1 button repeatedly to enable the letters or numbers to be input.
2
Press the number buttons to enter a letter or number you want.
You can enter the letter shown on each button by pressing it repeatedly.
You can enter the number shown on each button by pressing it once.
Using the Menus
51
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
When the “Cancel” button is displayed in the menu
If you press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Cancel” and press the ENTER button, the setting or adjustment is canceled
and the previous one is restored.
To enter a symbol
Press the F2 button repeatedly to select the desired symbol. Pressing the 0
button repeatedly also enables you to enter a symbol.
To enter a dot (.) for an IP address
Press the b button or DOT button.
Note
When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv6” or “IPv4/IPv6” in the Administrator setup
menu, you can enter colons (:).
When “IPv4/IPv6” is specified, only colons can be entered with the b button. When
“IPv4/IPv6” is specified and you are calling using IPv4, press the DOT button twice to
enter a dot.
To delete a character
Press the BACK SPACE button. The last entered character is deleted.
To delete all the characters entered
Press the F3 button.
Entering Characters Using the On-Screen Keyboard
This section explains how to enter the letters or numbers in the text box in the
menu using the on-screen keyboard displayed on the monitor screen.
When “Display On-Screen Keyboard” is set to “On” in the Menu Screens page
of the General setup menu (page 75), the on-screen keyboard automatically
appears on the screen if character input is required in the menu.
Note
You can also use the buttons on the Remote Commander even when the on-screen
keyboard is displayed on the screen.
To enter letters or numbers
Num
1
ABC
DEF
Alpha
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ Symbol
0
Back
Space
Dot
Space
End
52
Cancel
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Num”
or “Alpha” on the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER button.
Select “Num” to enter numbers, and “Alpha” to enter alphabetic letters.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the button
on the on-screen keyboard on which the desired character is indicated, then
press the ENTER button.
Using the Menus
When you select a number, the selected number is entered.
When you select an alphabetic letter, a submenu with available letters
appears on the on-screen keyboard. Select the desired letter and press the
ENTER button on the Remote Commander. The selected letter is entered.
1
DEF
GHI
JKL
Previous
MNO
A B CTUV
PQRS
a b c
0
Back
Space
WXYZ Symbol
Dot
Space
End
Cancel
3
Repeat step 2 to enter all the letters or numbers.
4
After the input is complete, select “End”, then press the ENTER button on
the Remote Commander.
To enter a symbol
1
Select “Symbol” on the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER button
on the Remote Commander.
The submenu with available symbols are displayed.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
desired symbol, then press the ENTER button.
The selected symbol is entered.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the symbols.
4
After the input is complete, select “End”, then press the ENTER button on
the Remote Commander.
To enter a dot (.) for an IP address
Select “b” or “Dot” on the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER button
on the Remote Commander.
To enter a space
Select “Space”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
To delete a character
To erase the last entered character, select “Back Space”, then press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
To delete all the characters entered
Select “Cancel”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
Pressing the F3 button on the Remote Commander also deletes all the
characters entered.
Using the Menus
53
Chapter 1: Installation and Preparation
Alpha
ABC
Chapter 2:
Registration and
Setup for System
Administrators
This chapter describes the registration and settings to be carried out by the
system administrator. The chapter is intended to be read by the system
administrator.
Registering Local Information
Before connecting, set up the local system using the Setup menus. This section
describes how to display the Setup menus and gives a introduction to the
menus.
Opening the Setup Menu
1
Press the Tools button on the Remote Commander, or use the V, v, B or b
button to select “Tools” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button.
The Tools menu appears on the monitor screen.
Tools
Home
Machine Status
Setup
54
Registering Local Information
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
2
Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Setup”, then press the ENTER button
on the Remote Commander.
The Setup menu appears on the monitor screen.
Menu buttons
Setup
Home
Line I/F
Line I/F
Dial
Back to Tools
Answer
Line Interface
IP
ISDN
SIP
ISDN
SIP
Primary Line Interface
Multipoint
Audio1
IP
Video2
LAN
LAN
LAN
SIP
For a description of each setup menu, see the page for that menu indicated
below.
Line Interface setup menu (see page 57)
Dial setup menu (see page 57)
Answer setup menu (see page 58)
Multipoint setup menu (see page 58)
Communication setup menu (see page 59)
Audio setup menu (see page 62)
Video setup menu (see page 65)
LAN setup menu (see page 66)
QoS setup menu (see page 69)
TOS setup menu (see page 70)
SIP setup menu (see page 71)
ISDN setup menu (see page 71)
Annotation setup menu (see page 73)
Camera setup menu (see page 74)
General setup menu (see page 74)
Home Menu setup menu (see page 76)
Administrator setup menu (see page 77)
Encryption setup menu (see page 82)
Shared Phone Book setup menu (see page 82)
Registering Local Information
55
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Menus available from a setup menu
The Setup menus are grouped into the following depending on the setting
items. The setup menus that include many setting items are divided into
multiple pages. Select an appropriate menu button to set the respective
item.
The commonly-used menu buttons are displayed on the screen at the
factory. Pressing the F4 button on the Remote Commander allows you to
display the maximum number of setup menu buttons. To restore the
commonly-used setup display, press the F4 button again.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the menu
button you want to set, then press the ENTER or b button.
The selected setup menu appears.
Setting items
Menu button
Setup
Dial
Dial
Telephone Mode
Auto
More Options Enable
On
User Name Input
On
Prefix
Prefix-None
Prefix-A
Prefix-B
Prefix-C
LAN Prefix
Disable
LAN Prefix
Save
4
Cancel
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the setting
item, then press the ENTER button.
Setup
Dial
Dial
Telephone Mode
Auto
Auto
G.711 µ-law
G.711 A-law
Save
5
Cancel
Select the desired item from the drop-down list, or enter the characters in
the text box.
For individual items, see pages 57 to 82.
6
After the selection or character input is completed, use the V, v, B or b
button to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.
The setting is saved, and the Setup menu is restored.
To cancel the setup
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Cancel”,
then press the ENTER button. Or press the RETURN button on the Remote
Commander.
To return to the left column
Press the B button or RETURN button on the Remote Commander.
56
Registering Local Information
Line Interface Setup Menu
The Line Interface setup menu is used to
select the line interface you use for
connection with a remote party.
Line I/F
Line I/F
Primary Line Interface
Allows you to select the line interface you
use most from among IP, SIP and ISDN.
Dial Setup Menu
The Dial setup menu is used to set the
attributes for dialing.
Dial
Dial
Telephone Mode
Allows you to select the audio compression
format when conducting a voice meeting.
Auto: Selects an appropriate format
automatically.
G.711µ-law: Selects the format based on the
G.711µ-law standard.
G.711A-law: Selects the format based on
the G.711A-law standard.
More Options Enable
Allows you to select whether to display the
More Options button in the List Edit menu
of the Phone Book. You can set the detailed
items for dialing in the List Edit menu by
selecting the More Options button.
On: Displays the More Options button.
Off: Does not display the More Options
button.
User Name Input
Allows you to select whether to register user
names in the communications log when
connection is made.
Prefix
Select the prefix number (call number
prefixed to a line number).
Prefix-None: Select when you are not using
a prefix number.
Prefix-A: Select when you use the prefix set
in “Prefix-A”.
Prefix-B: Select when you use the prefix set
in “Prefix-B”.
Prefix-C: Select when you use the prefix set
in “Prefix-C”.
Prefix-A
When “Prefix” is set to “Prefix-A”, the line
number prefixed by the prefix (dial number)
registered in this box is dialed.
Prefix-B
When “Prefix” is set to “Prefix-B”, the line
number prefixed by the prefix (dial number)
registered in this box is dialed.
Prefix-C
When “Prefix” is set to “Prefix-C”, the line
number prefixed by the prefix (dial number)
registered in this box is dialed.
Note
Enter “9” when this is required to make an
outgoing call.
Select LAN Prefix
Allows you to select whether to use the LAN
prefix when dialing via a LAN.
Disable: Disables the LAN prefix.
Enable: Enables the LAN prefix.
LAN Prefix
When dialing using the IP connection, the
information entered into this box is added to
the beginning of the IP address. Select
whether to use the LAN prefix in “Select
LAN Prefix”.
Registering Local Information
57
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Line Interface
Allows you to select the line interface from
among “IP”, “ISDN” and “SIP”. You can
select multiple interfaces.
Off: Disables the recording of the user
names.
On: Select when you want to record user
names. Each time dialing takes place,
the user name input menu appears.
Answer Setup Menu
The Answer setup menu is used to set up call
reception.
Answer
Answer
Auto Answer
Allows you to select whether the system
answers calls automatically.
On: Answers calls automatically. When a
call comes in, the line is automatically
connected.
Off: Allows you to answer calls manually.
When a call comes in, the phone rings. If
you select “OK” in the “Answer?”
message, the line is connected.
ISDN MSN
Allows you to select whether you are using
the Multiple Subscriber Number.
Off: Select when you do not use the
Multiple Subscriber Number.
On: Select when you use the Multiple
Subscriber Number.
Mic on Answer
Allows you to select whether to transmit
audio from your site when you receive a call
and connect it.
On: Enables transmission of audio when
answering a call.
Off: Disables transmission of audio when
answering a call.
For details, see “Turning Off the Sound
Momentarily – Muting Function” on page
123.
Reject Answer
Allows you to select whether to connect a
remote party’s calling during
communication.
On: Disables the connection of a remote
party.
Off: Enables the connection of a remote
party.
58
Registering Local Information
Multipoint Setup Menu
The Multipoint setup menu is used to set up
multipoint connection when the local
system is used as the main terminal.
Multipoint
Multipoint
Multipoint Mode
AUTO: Switches from point-to-point
connection to multipoint connection
automatically.
On: Enables you to make a multipoint
connection at any time.
Broadcast Mode
Allows you to select the broadcast mode.
Split: Displays the picture from the
connected terminals in split windows.
Voice Activate: Detects the terminal where
a speaker has the loudest voice, and
automatically transmits the picture of
this terminal to all other terminals.
Voice Activate (720P): Enables
transmission of pictures with resolution
of 720p (1280 × 720 pixels) in H.264
Video Mode when “Voice Activate”
mode is activated.
Notes
• The “Voice Activate (720P)” mode cannot
be selected when the communication is made
via an ISDN or SIP connection. Even for an
IP connection, this mode is not available if
the remote party does not support H.264
Video Mode.
• When “Broadcast Mode” is set to “Voice
Activate (720P)”, you cannot change
“Broadcast Mode” during communication.
Select the Broadcast Mode before starting
communication.
Split
Allows you to select the type of split display
used to display local and remote pictures on
a single monitor during a multipoint
connection.
Four-screen Mosaic: The display is split
into four parts.
Six-screen Mosaic: The display is split into
six parts.
Note
Note
When there is only one terminal connected, the
display switches to full screen regardless of the
selection of the setting.
Communication Setup Menu
The Communication setup menu is used to
set up communications.
Note
Communication
IP
The menu is used to set up the
communication mode for the IP connection.
Individual Settings for Transmission/
Reception
Allows you to select whether to configure
the IP settings for transmission and
reception individually.
Off: Select to configure the IP settings for
transmission and reception commonly.
On: Select to configure the IP settings for
transmission and reception individually.
Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/
Multipoint
Allows you to select whether to configure
the IP settings for a point-to-point
connection and multipoint connection
individually.
Off: Select to configure the IP settings for
both connections commonly.
On: Select to configure the IP settings for a
point-to-point connection and
multipoint connection individually.
Communication
IP: Mode
Total Bandwidth
Allows you to select the total bandwidth to
be used with this system.
In multipoint connection, the total
bandwidth of all points is displayed.
You can select from among 128Kbps,
384Kbps, 512Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps,
4Mbps, and Other.
Note
In multipoint connection, the actual
Communication Bit Rate for each point is
automatically adjusted so as not to exceed
“Total Bandwidth”.
Communication Bit Rate
Allows you to select the communication bit
rate per point.
When “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual
Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on
the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this
item for transmission and reception, and
point-to-point and multipoint connections
individually.
You can select from among 128Kbps,
384Kbps, 512Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps,
4Mbps and Other.
Audio Mode
Allows you to select the compression format
of audio to be sent to a remote party.
When “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual
Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on
the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this
item for transmission and reception, and
point-to-point and multipoint connections
individually.
You can select multiple formats from among
G.711, G.722, G.728 and MPEG4 (MPEG4
AAC).
Registering Local Information
59
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
The contents of the Communication setup
menu vary with “Line Interface” setting in the
Line I/F setup menu, or “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual
Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” setting
in the Communication setup menu. Only the
settings that can be configured will appear on
the screen.
The Communication page number after the
Communication2 page also varies according to
the number of setting items.
The setting items and page numbers in the IP:
Mode page vary according to the setting of
“Individual Settings”.
Note
When the remote system does not support the
audio mode selected by the local site, the mode
automatically becomes “G.711”.
Far End Camera Control
Allows you to select whether to enable the
control of each other’s cameras from each
other’s site.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” for IP is set to “On”, you
can set this item individually for point-topoint and multipoint connections.
On: Enables the control of each other’s
cameras. Normally, set to “On”.
Off: Disables the control of each other’s
cameras.
H.239
Use of the presentation mode complying
with H.239 allows you to transmit the
presentation data and picture from the
camera simultaneously.
This item allows you to select whether to use
the presentation mode based on the H.239
presentation standard.
On: Enables the presentation mode based on
the H.239 presentation standard.
Off: Disables the presentation mode based
on the H.239 presentation standard.
H.239 Ratio
When H.239 presentation transmissions are
made with the system, the H.239
presentation data shares bandwidth with
camera images that are also being sent. This
setting allows you to select how much of the
total bandwidth to use for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
2/3: Use 2/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
1/2: Use 1/2 of the total bandwidth for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
1/3: Use 1/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
Screen Size
Allows you to select the screen size of the
picture to be transmitted or received.
When “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual
Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on
the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this
60
Registering Local Information
item for transmission and reception, and
point-to-point and multipoint connections
individually.
You can select from among 720, W4CIF,
W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF and
AUTO.
Video Mode
Allows you to select the compression format
of pictures to be transmitted or received.
When “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual
Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on
the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this
item for transmission and reception, and
point-to-point and multipoint connections
individually.
You can select from among H.261, H.263+,
and H.264.
Video Frame
Allows you to select the number of video
frames during transmission or reception.
When “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual
Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” on
the IP page is set to “On”, you can set this
item for transmission and reception, and
point-to-point and multipoint connections
individually.
15fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
15 frames per second.
30fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
30 frames per second.
60fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
60 frames per second.
AUTO: Switch the number of frames
automatically.
Communication
ISDN
The menu is used to set up the
communication mode for an ISDN
connection.
Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/
Multipoint
Allows you to select whether to configure
the ISDN settings for point-to-point and
multipoint connections individually.
Off: Select to configure the ISDN settings
for both connections commonly.
On: Select to configure the ISDN settings
for point-to-point and multipoint
connections individually.
Note
The setting items and page numbers for
“ISDN: Mode” varies according to the setting
of “Individual Settings”.
Communication
ISDN: Mode
ISDN Bandwidth (Answer)
Allows you to select the number of ISDN
lines used for answering.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
You can select from among 1B (64K), 2B
(128K), 3B (192K), 4B (256K), 5B (320K),
6B (384K), 8B (512K) and 12B (768K).
Audio Mode
Allows you to select the compression format
of audio to be sent to a remote party.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
You can select from among G.711, G.722,
G.728 and MPEG4 (MPEG4 AAC).
Note
When the remote system does not support the
audio mode selected by the local site, the mode
automatically becomes “G.711”.
Far End Camera Control
Allows you to select whether to enable the
control of each other’s cameras from each
other’s site.
H.239
Allows you to select whether to use the
presentation mode based on the H.239
presentation standard.
On: Enables the presentation mode based on
the H.239 presentation standard.
Off: Disables the presentation mode based
on the H.239 presentation standard.
H.239 Ratio
When H.239 presentation transmissions are
made with the system, the H.239
presentation data shares bandwidth with
camera images that are also being sent. This
setting allows you to select how much of the
total bandwidth to use for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
2/3: Use 2/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
1/2: Use 1/2 of the total bandwidth for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
1/3: Use 1/3 of the total bandwidth for H.239
presentation data transmissions.
Restrict
Allows you to select the ISDN transmission
rate.
Auto: Select when connecting a remote
party via a normal ISDN line.
56K: Select when connecting a remote party
located in a region or country where the
ISDN transmission rate is 56 Kbps.
Note
The system is set to connect an ISDN line at the
transmission rate of 64 Kbps by default.
However, some countries, such as the USA,
and some regions may use the ISDN
transmission rate of 64 Kbps and 56 Kbps. You
may not communicate with such countries or
regions at 64 Kbps, so you must therefore set
“Restrict” to “56K” before dialing.
Registering Local Information
61
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
ISDN Bandwidth (Dial)
Allows you to select the number of ISDN
lines used for dialing.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
You can select from among 1B (64K), 2B
(128K), 3B (192K), 4B (256K), 5B (320K),
6B (384K), 8B (512K) and 12B (768K).
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
On: Enables the control of each other’s
cameras. Normally, set to “On”.
Off: Disables the control of each other’s
cameras.
Screen Size
Allows you to select the screen size of the
picture to be transmitted or received.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
You can select from among W4CIF,
W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF and AUTO.
Video Mode
Allows you to select the compression format
of pictures to be transmitted or received.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
You can select from among H.261, H.263+,
and H.264.
Video Frame
Allows you to select the number of video
frames during transmission or reception.
When “Individual Settings for Point-toPoint/Multipoint” on the ISDN page is set to
“On”, you can set this item for point-to-point
and multipoint connections individually.
15fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
15 frames per second.
30fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
30 frames per second.
AUTO: Switch the number of frames
automatically.
Communication
SIP: Mode
Communication Bit Rate
Allows you to select the communication bit
rate per point
You can select from among 128Kbps,
384Kbps, 512Kbps, 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps,
4Mbps and Other.
Audio Mode
Allows you to select the compression format
of audio to be sent to a remote party.
You can select from among G.728, G.722
and G.711.
62
Registering Local Information
Note
When the remote system does not support the
audio mode selected by the local site, the mode
automatically becomes “G.711”.
Far End Camera Control
Allows you to select whether to enable the
control of each other’s cameras from each
other’s site.
On: Enables the control of each other’s
cameras. Normally, set to “On”.
Off: Disables the control of each other’s
cameras.
Screen Size
Allows you to select the screen size of the
picture to be transmitted or received.
You can select from among 720, W4CIF,
W432P, WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF and
AUTO.
Video Mode
Allows you to select the compression format
of pictures to be transmitted or received.
You can select from among H.261, H.263+,
H.264 and MPEG4.
Video Frame
Allows you to select the number of video
frames during transmission or reception.
15fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
15 frames per second.
30fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
30 frames per second.
60fps: Send pictures at a maximum rate of
60 frames per second.
AUTO: Switch the number of frames
automatically.
Audio Setup Menu
The Audio setup menu is used to set various
audio items.
Audio1
Basic Setup1
Audio Input
Allows you to select the audio input.
MIC: Inputs audio from the microphone.
AUX: Inputs audio from auxiliary external
equipment.
MIC+AUX: Inputs audio from the
microphone and auxiliary external
equipment.
Note
When “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On” in
the Video setup menu, “Audio Input”, “Input
Select (MIC)” and “Input Select (AUX)”
cannot be selected.
Echo Canceller
Allows you to select whether to use the
internal echo canceller.
On: Enables the internal echo canceller.
Off: Disables the internal echo canceller.
Note
When “Audio Input” is set to “AUX”, the echo
canceller will not function.
Lip Sync
Allows you to select whether to use the Lip
Sync function.
Auto: Enables the Lip Sync function.
Off: Disables the Lip Sync function.
Recording Mute
When you connect an audio recording
device to the AUDIO IN and REC OUT
jacks to record audio, this function reduces
oscillations in sound that occur due to loopback within audio recording device.
Off: Disables the recording mute function.
On: Enables the recording mute function.
Notes
• When “Recording Mute” is set to “On”, only
signals from external equipment are affected.
Signals from the microphones or remote sites
are not affected. Therefore, the Recording
Mute functions only when “Audio Input” is
set to “AUX” or “MIC+AUX.”
• When connecting an audio recording device
to the AUDIO IN and REC OUT jacks, set
“Recording Mute” to “On” and record the
sound only from the audio recording device.
If you want to record the sound on your site
as well, also use the microphone input.
Input Mode
Allows you to select the input audio mode.
Stereo: Inputs audio to the R/L jacks of the
audio input as stereo left and right
sounds.
Monaural: Inputs audio to the R/L jacks of
the audio input as monaural sound.
Output Mode
Allows you to select the output audio mode.
Stereo: Outputs audio from the system’s
speakers or from the (headphone) jack
as left/right stereo sound.
Monaural: Outputs audio from the system’s
speakers or from the (headphone) jack
as two-channel monaural sound.
Registering Local Information
63
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Input Select (MIC)/
Input Select (AUX)
Allows you to select the microphone and/or
external equipment from which an audio
signal is input.
The options that can be selected vary with
the Audio Input setting.
When you select “MIC”, you can select one
of the following three options. When you
select “AUX”, “AUDIO” is selected. When
you select “MIC+AUX”, you can select the
“MIC (Camera)” or “MIC (A1/A3)” option
for MIC, and “AUDIO” is selected for AUX.
MIC (Camera): Select to use the
microphone that is built into the camera
portion of the system.
MIC (A1/A3): Select use of the PCS-A1
microphone (not supplied) or PCSA-A3
microphone (not supplied) connected to
the MIC (A1/A3) jacks on the
Communication System.
AUDIO: Select to input the audio of
external equipment connected to the
AUDIO IN jack on the Communication
System.
Notes
• When “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”,
“Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” or
“Forward Error Correction (FEC)” is set to
“On” in the QoS setup menu, you cannot set
“Lip Sync” to “Off”.
• When “Lip Sync” is set to “Off”, you cannot
change the setting for “Adaptive Rate
Control (ARC)”, “Packet Resend Request
(ARQ)” or “Forward Error Correction
(FEC)” in the QoS setup menu.
Audio2
Basic Setup2
AUX Local Monitor Out
Allows you to select whether the audio input
from the AUDIO IN jacks outputs to the
audio output jacks on the Communication
System.
On: Enables output from the audio output.
Off: Disables output from the audio output.
Reversed MIC Inputs
Allows you to select whether to transmit the
audio input from the microphone with right
and left reversed. If you select “On”, you can
match the right and left of the camera image
and audio.
Off: Transmits the audio with right and left
not reversed.
On: Transmits the audio with right and left
reversed.
Audio Input Delay Setting
Allows you to set Audio Input Delay to
synchronize the audio with the video input.
Default –100ms: Selects the default delay
minus 100ms.
Default –50ms: Selects the default delay
minus 50ms.
Default: Selects the default delay.
Default + 50ms: Selects the default delay
plus 50ms.
Default + 100ms: Selects the default delay
plus 100ms.
Custom: Uses the Audio Input Delay you
set.
Audio Input Delay
When you set “Audio Input Delay Setting”
to “Custom”, you can set the delay time of
the input audio to match the image and
audio.
Audio Output Delay Setting
Allows you to set Audio Output Delay to
synchronize the audio with the video output.
Default –100ms: Selects the default delay
minus 100ms.
Default –50ms: Selects the default delay
minus 50ms.
Default: Selects the default delay.
Default + 50ms: Selects the default delay
plus 50ms.
64
Registering Local Information
Default + 100ms: Selects the default delay
plus 100ms.
Custom: Uses the Audio Output Delay you
set.
Audio Output Delay
When you set “Audio Output Delay Setting”
to “Custom”, you can set the delay time of
the output audio to match the image and
audio.
REC OUT Mode
Stereo: The mixed sounds of the remote and
local sites are output from the REC OUT
R and L jacks in stereo.
Monaural 2ch: The sounds of the remote
and local sites are output from the REC
OUT R and L jacks separately.
Lens Cover Mic On/Off Function
Select whether the mic turns on or off based
on whether the lens cover is open or closed.
On: When the lens cover is closed, the mic
turns off.
Off: Opening and closing of the lens cover
does not affect the mic.
Audio3
Sound Effect
Beep Sound
Allows you to select the volume of the beep
that sounds each time you press a button on
the Remote Commander from among
“Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”. You can
also select “Off” for the beep not to sound.
Sound Effect
Allows you to select the volume of output
sound when the system starts, or when
connection starts or is disconnected from
among “Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”.
You can also select “Off” for the sound not
to be output.
Dial Tone
Allows you to select the volume of a ringback and busy tones when you are dialing
from among “Loud”, “Medium” and
“Quiet”. You can also select “Off” for the
ring-back and busy tones not to be output.
Ringer Tone
Allows you to select the volume of a ring
tone when you receive a call from among
“Loud”, “Medium” and “Quiet”. You can
also select “Off” for the ring tone not to be
output.
Video Setup Menu
Video1
Basic Setup
Video Input
Allows you to select the video input.
Camera: Selects the camera picture from
the built-in camera.
RGB: Selects the video signal from the
external equipment connected to the
RGB IN connector.
Presentation Screen
Allows you to select the display pattern of
the presentation screen.
The “Presentation Screen” settings are
enabled when “H.239” is disabled during the
communication.
Full Screen: Sends the computer picture,
etc. from the external equipment
connected to the RGB IN connector in
full screen mode.
PandP: Sends the computer picture, etc.
from the external equipment connected
to the RGB IN connector and the
selected input picture such as a camera
picture in PandP mode.
Side by Side: Sends the computer picture,
etc. from the external equipment
connected to the RGB IN connector and
the selected input picture such as a
camera picture in Side by Side mode.
Monitor Output
Allows you to select the video signal output
from the Communication System.
Single: Outputs the video signal to the
system’s monitor.
Dual: Outputs the video signal to both the
system’s monitor and the external
RGB Monitor Output Format
Allows you to select the format of the signal
output from the RGB OUT connector.
SXGA: Outputs the SXGA signal.
XGA: Outputs the XGA signal.
WXGA: Outputs the WXGA signal.
Blanking Period
Allows you to select the duration of the
blackout period that occurs temporarily on
the monitor of the Communication System
when the input picture is switched.
You can select among from Long, Medium
and Short.
Video2
Custom Input
Label
Allows you to set the names of the selected
video inputs using up to 12 characters.
Custom Input Label (Camera)
Selects when “Camera” is selected in
“Video Input”.
Custom Input Label (RGB)
Selects when “RGB” is selected in “Video
Input”.
Video3
Link to Mic
Allows you to select whether to link an
audio input to the selected video input.
Link to Audio Input
Allows you to switch the audio input in
conjunction with switching the video input
by linking each video input and a specific
microphone or other audio input.
Off: Switches the video input and the
microphone or other audio input
separately.
On: Links switching of the video input and
the microphone or other audio input.
Registering Local Information
65
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
The Video setup menu is used to set up video
input/output.
device connected to the RGB OUT
connector.
Note
When “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On”,
“Audio Input”, “Input Select (MIC)” and
“Input Select (AUX)” on the Basic Setup1
page of Audio setup menu cannot be selected.
Video Input
Allows you to select the video input.
Camera: Selects the camera picture from
the built-in camera.
RGB: Selects the picture from the external
equipment connected to the RGB IN
connector.
Audio Input
Allows you to select the audio input which is
linked to the video input selected in “Video
Input” when “Link to Audio Input” is set to
“On”.
MIC: Inputs audio from the microphone.
AUX: Inputs audio from the external
equipment.
MIC+AUX: Inputs audio both from the
microphone and external equipment.
Input Select (MIC)
Input Select (AUX)
Allows you to select the audio input from the
microphone and/or external equipment
when “Link to Audio Input” is set to “On”.
The options that can be selected vary with
the Audio Input setting.
When you select “MIC”, you can select one
of the following three options. When you
select “AUX”, “AUDIO” is selected. When
you select “MIC+AUX”, you can select the
“MIC (Camera)” or “MIC (A1/A3)” option
for MIC, and “AUDIO” is selected for AUX.
MIC (Camera): Select to use the
microphone that is built into the camera
portion of the system.
MIC (A1/A3): Select use of the PCS-A1
microphone (not supplied) or PCSA-A3
microphone (not supplied) connected to
the MIC (A1/A3) jacks on the
Communication System.
AUDIO: Select to input the audio of
external equipment connected to the
AUDIO IN jack on the Communication
System.
66
Registering Local Information
LAN Setup Menu
The LAN setup menu is used to set up LAN
connection.
For details about the settings, consult your
network administrator.
Note
The contents of the LAN setup menu vary
depending on the “Internet Protocol” setting in
the Administrator setup menu.
The page numbers also vary according to the
number of setting items.
LAN
Basic Setup:
LAN1
Host Name
Enter your host name (up to 30 characters).
DHCP Mode
Allows you to select whether the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
is enabled.
Auto: The IP address, network mask,
gateway address and DNS address are
automatically assigned.
Off: Disables the DHCP server. In this case,
enter an IP address, network mask,
gateway address and DNS address.
Prefix Length
Configure the prefix length of the IPv6
address within the range of 0 to 128.
IP Address
Enter the IP address.
Network Mask
Enter the network mask.
Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway address.
Primary DNS
Enter a primary DNS address.
Secondary DNS
Enter a secondary DNS address.
LAN
Basic Setup:
Secondary DNS
Enter a secondary DNS address.
LAN Mode
Allows you to select the interface type and
the communication mode of the LAN
connection.
Auto: The interface type and the
communication mode are detected
automatically.
100Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via
100BASE-TX in full duplex mode.
100Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via
100BASE-TX in half duplex mode.
10Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via
10BASE-T in full duplex mode.
10Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via
10BASE-T in half duplex mode.
LAN1: IPv6
LAN
Note
When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4/IPv6”
in the Administrator setup menu, the setup
screen for IPv6 appears. In such cases,
configure the LAN mode in the IPv6 setup
screen.
DHCP Mode
Allows you to select whether the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
is enabled.
Auto: The IP address, network mask,
gateway address and DNS address are
automatically assigned.
Off: Disables the DHCP server. In this case,
enter an IP address, network mask,
gateway address and DNS address.
PPPoE
PPPoE
Allows you to select whether to use PPPoE
for LAN connection.
When using PPPoE, you can use the B
FLET’S* or FLET’S ADSL service without
connecting a router.
Off: Does not use PPPoE.
On: Uses PPPoE for LAN connection using
the
(LAN) connector.
Notes
• Operations of PPPoE for LAN connection
are presently verified only for the Japanese
NTT B FLET’S and FLET’S ADSL services.
• The PPPoE registration status appears at the
bottom of the screen for each page.
Prefix Length
Configure the prefix length of the IPv6
address within the range of 0 to 128.
* “FLET’S” is a trademark of NTT East and
NTT West Corporations in Japan.
IP Address
Enter the IP address.
User Alias
Enter a user name when you use PPPoE for
LAN connection.
Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway address.
Primary DNS
Enter a primary DNS address.
Password
Enter a password when you use PPPoE for
LAN connection.
Fixed IP for PPPoE
Select whether to make a PPPoE connection
using a fixed IP address.
Registering Local Information
67
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
LAN Mode
Allows you to select the interface type and
the communication mode of the LAN
connection.
Auto: The interface type and the
communication mode are detected
automatically.
100Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via
100BASE-TX in full duplex mode.
100Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via
100BASE-TX in half duplex mode.
10Mbps Full Duplex: Connects via
10BASE-T in full duplex mode.
10Mbps Half Duplex: Connects via
10BASE-T in half duplex mode.
Off: Does not use a fixed IP address for a
PPPoE connection.
On: Uses a fixed IP address for a PPPoE
connection.
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE
Enter an IP address when “Fixed IP for
PPPoE” is set to “On”.
DNS
Allows you to select whether to obtain DNS
server addresses automatically or to specify
them manually when connecting to a LAN
using PPPoE.
Obtain automatically: Assigns DNS server
addresses automatically.
Specify: Allows you to specify DNS server
addresses.
Primary DNS
Enter a primary DNS address.
Secondary DNS
Enter a secondary DNS address.
LAN
NAT Setup
NAT Mode
Allows you to select whether you connect
the system to a local network using Network
Address Translation (NAT), which allows
one IP address to be shared by several
computers on the same LAN.
Auto: Enables or disables the NAT mode by
automatically detecting the use of NAT.
This option is effective only when you
use the UPnP router.
On: Enables NAT mode.
Off: Disables NAT mode.
WAN IP Address
Enter the IP address for the Wide Area
Network (WAN).
LAN
Gatekeeper
Note
When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4/IPv6”
in the Administrator setup menu, configure the
settings in the “Gatekeeper: IPv6” screen.
68
Registering Local Information
Gatekeeper Mode
Allows you to select whether to use the
gatekeeper to control access to a LAN.
Using the gatekeeper allows you to dial
using the user name or user number as well
as dialing using the IP address.
Auto: Automatically detects the gatekeeper
and uses it.
On: Enables the gatekeeper.
Off: Disables the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper Address
Enter the address of the gatekeeper used
when “Gatekeeper Mode” is set to “On”.
User Alias
Enter the user name (H.323 alias) registered
in the gatekeeper.
User Number
Enter the user number (E.164 number)
registered in the gatekeeper.
H.460
Allows you to select whether to use H.460 to
traverse firewalls and connect to the
terminals on other networks.
On: Enables connection that traverses
H.460 standard firewalls.
Off: Disables connection that traverses
firewalls.
LAN
Gatekeeper: IPv6
Note
This appears when “Internet Protocol” is set to
“IPv4/IPv6” in the Administrator setup menu.
Gatekeeper Mode
Allows you to select whether to use the
gatekeeper to control access to a LAN.
Using the gatekeeper allows you to dial
using the user name or user number as well
as dialing using the IP address.
Auto: Automatically detects the gatekeeper
and uses it.
On: Enables the gatekeeper.
Off: Disables the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper Address
Enter the address of the gatekeeper used
when “Gatekeeper Mode” is set to “On”.
User Alias
Enter the user name (H.323 alias) registered
in the gatekeeper.
User Number
Enter the user number (E.164 number)
registered in the gatekeeper.
LAN
Used Port
Number, RTP/RTCP Setup
H.245
Enter the H.245 port number.
RTP/RTCP
Enter the RTP/RTCP port number.
MTU Size
Enter the MTU size.
QoS Setup Menu
Specifies the functions for providing
optimum consistent communication.
Notes
• When “Lip Sync” is set to “Off” in the Audio
setup menu, you cannot change the setting
for “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”, “Packet
Resend Request (ARQ)” or “Forward Error
Correction (FEC)”.
• When “Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)”,
“Packet Resend Request (ARQ)” or
“Forward Error Correction (FEC)” is set to
“On”, you cannot set “Lip Sync” to “Off” in
the Audio setup menu.
QoS1
LAN
SNMP
SNMP Mode
Allows you to select whether the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
agent is enabled.
On: Enables the SNMP agent.
Off: Disables the SNMP agent.
Trap Destination
Enter the address of the trap destination
SNMP manager.
Community
Enter the community name managed by the
SNMP manager (up to 24 characters). By
default, “public” is entered.
Description
Enter the description of this terminal. By
default, “Videoconference Device” is
entered and can not be changed.
Location
Enter the location where this terminal is
installed (up to 30 characters).
Basic Setup
Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)
Allows you to select whether to always
optimize the LAN bandwidth.
On: Always optimizes the LAN bandwidth.
Off: Does not optimize the LAN bandwidth.
Auto Bandwidth Detection
Allows you to select whether you use the
Auto Bandwidth Detection feature.
On: Enables the Auto Bandwidth Detection
feature.
Off: Disables the Auto Bandwidth Detection
feature.
TCP Port Number
Enter the fixed TCP port number.
UDP Port Number
Enter the fixed UDP port number.
For details on the port numbers used on the
system, see “List of Port Numbers Used on
the PCS-XL55” on page 241.
Registering Local Information
69
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Q.931
Enter the Q.931 port number.
Contact
Enter information about the terminal
administrator (up to 30 characters).
Packet Resend Request (ARQ)
Allows you to select whether to request
packet to be resent when packet losses occur
during communication.
On: Requests packets to be resent.
Off: Does not request packets to be resent.
ARQ Buffering Time
Set the buffering time used for “Packet
Resend Request”.
You can select from among “300ms”,
“150ms”, “80ms”, “Auto” and “Custom”.
When “Custom” is selected, you can specify
any buffering time.
ARQ Buffering Time
Enter the buffering time (50 ms to 999 ms)
when you select “Custom” in “ARQ
Buffering Time”.
Forward Error Correction (FEC)
Allows you to select whether received
packets are identified with an error
correction mark.
On: Identifies with an error correction mark.
Off: Not identify with an error correction
mark.
FEC Redundancy
Allows you to set redundancy of the packet
used for the Forward Error Correction
(FEC).
You can select from among “8”, “4”, “2” and
“Auto”. When you select “8”, “4” and “2”,
the communication bit rate may be different
from the specified value.
Audio Duplex Transmission
Allows you to select whether to
automatically transmit audio in double when
audio communication is interrupted
depending on a network status.
On: Enables the Audio Duplex
Transmission feature.
Off: Disables the Audio Duplex
Transmission feature.
70
Registering Local Information
QoS2
Re-Order/Shaping
Re-Order
Allows you to select whether to correct reorder that may cause packet loss (invalid
order of arrival in the packet). Correcting reorder enables smoother picture and sound.
On: Corrects re-order.
Off: Does not correct re-order.
Re-Order Buffer
Allows you to select re-order buffer.
You can select from among “Auto”, “1”,
“2” and “Custom”.
Re-Order Buffer Rate
Enter the re-order buffer rate. You can enter
the value between 1 and 5.
Shaping
Allows you to select whether to use shaping,
which adjusts the IP packet transfer rate.
On: Uses shaping.
Off: Does not use shaping.
.
TOS Setup Menu
TOS
TOS
TOS Data Type
Allows you to select the type of data for
which you configure the TOS (Type of
Service) field.
Video: Configure the TOS field for video
data.
Audio: Configure the TOS field for audio
data.
Data: Configure the TOS field for camera
control signals, etc.
Presentation: Configure the TOS field for
the RGB presentation data.
TOS
Allows you to select how to define the TOS
(Type of Service) field of the data selected in
“TOS Data Type”.
Off: Does not define the TOS field.
IP Precedence: Defines the TOS field as IP
Precedence.
DSCP: Defines the TOS field as the
Differentiated Services Code Point
(DSCP). Enter the value between 0 and
63.
SIP
Basic Setup
Low Delay
Allows you to select whether to specify the
Low Delay bit of the TOS field.
On: Specifies the Low Delay bit of the TOS
field.
Off: Does not specify the Low Delay bit of
the TOS field.
Transport Protocol
Allows you to select the protocol to be used
for SIP.
TCP: Uses TCP (Transmission Control
Protocol).
UDP: Uses UDP (User Datagram Protocol).
This is the factory default setting.
High Throughput
Allows you to select whether to specify the
High Throughput bit of the TOS field.
On: Specifies the High Throughput bit of
the TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the High Throughput
bit of the TOS field.
Port Number
Enter the port number to be used for SIP.
High Reliability
Allows you to select whether to specify the
High Reliability bit of the TOS field.
On: Specifies the High Reliability bit of the
TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the High Reliability
bit of the TOS field.
Minimum Cost
Allows you to select whether to specify the
Minimum Cost bit of the TOS field.
On: Specifies the Minimum Cost bit of the
TOS field.
Off: Does not specify the Minimum Cost bit
of the TOS field.
DSCP
Enter the DSCP value. This item only
appears when “TOS” is set to “DSCP”.
SIP Setup Menu
The SIP setup menu is used to connect with
an IP phone, etc. using the SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol).
SIP Domain
Enter the SIP domain name.
Registered User Name
Enter the user name for the terminal to be
registered to the SIP server (up to 39
characters).
Password
Set the password for the terminal to be
registered to the SIP server (up to 39
characters).
SIP Server Address
Enter the address of the SIP server.
SIP Server Port
Enter the port number used for
communication with the SIP server.
ISDN Setup Menu
The ISDN setup menu is used to set up ISDN
lines.
ISDN1
Basic Setup
Country/Region
Allows you to select the country or region
where you are using the Communication
System.
Registering Local Information
71
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Precedence
Enter the IP Precedence value between 0 and
7.
SIP Server Mode
Allows you to select whether you use a SIP
server or not.
On: Enables use of the SIP server.
Off: Disables use of the SIP server.
Protocol
Allows you to select the protocol of the
ISDN lines to be used. You can select
National ISDN, Japan (NTT), Euro ISDN,
Euro ISDN (France), 5ESS (P-P), or DMS100, depending on the interface that you are
using.
For customers in the USA and Canada, see
“SPID Settings for Customers in the USA
and Canada” on page 72.
ISDN2
Telephone
Number
Enter the area code and local number in the
text boxes corresponding to the port
numbers on the ISDN unit.
The text boxes correspond to the port
numbers on the ISDN unit in the following
way.
A1: Port 1 on the ISDN unit.
A2: Port 1 on the ISDN unit.
B1: Port 2 on the ISDN unit.
B2: Port 2 on the ISDN unit.
C1: Port 3 on the ISDN unit.
C2: Port 3 on the ISDN unit.
Area Code
Enter the area code of the ISDN line to be
used. Do not enter the first 0 of the area code.
Local Number
Enter the line number (local number) of the
ISDN line to be used.
Notes
• When you select an empty field and then
press the ENTER button of the Remote
Commander, the setting of the previous field
is copied into the selected field.
• When using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit,
selecting the ISDN3 button displays the D1
to F2 text boxes. Fill in the D1 to F2 text
boxes according to the lines that you are
using.
ISDN4
Sub Address
The A1 to C2 (or A1 to F2) fields appear.
72
Registering Local Information
Sub Address
Enter sub-addresses when registering them.
Sub-addresses can only be composed of
numbers.
ISDN5
SPID
The SPID (Service Profile Identifier) pages
are used only for customers in the USA and
Canada.
For details, see “SPID Settings for
Customers in the USA and Canada” on page
72.
SPID
The A1 to C2 (or A1 to F2) fields appear.
Enter SPID (Service Profile Identifier).
Auto SPID
When you select “Auto SPID”, you can
automatically set up the Area Code and
Local Number on the Telephone Number
page and SPID items.
SPID Settings for Customers
in the USA and Canada
If you connect to an ISDN switch type,
configuration of SPID (Service Profile
Identifier) is required.
If “Auto SPID” is not available in your area,
set up SPID manually using the ISDN setup
menu.
1
Open the Basic Setup page of the
ISDN setup menu.
2
Enter the country code in the Country/
Region Code text box depending on
the network switch type you are using.
AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN), NTI
DMS-100 (National ISDN): Enter “1”.
AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point Custom
ISDN): Enter “1*12”.
NTI DMS-100 (Custom ISDN): Enter
“1*11”.
3
Open the Telephone Number page to
enter the LDN (Local Directory
Number) in the Local Number text
boxes.
When you use the AT&T 5ESS
(Point-to-Point Custom ISDN)
switch type
When you use the NTI DMS-100
(National ISDN) or NTI DMS-100
(Custom ISDN) switch type
Enter the different LDNs in the A1
and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2,
depending on the number of lines you
use) text boxes. These switch types are
given a separate number for each
channel.
When you use the AT&T 5ESS
(National ISDN) switch type
You may enter the same or different
numbers in two channels.
4
Open the SPID page (ID page) to enter
the SPID.
The SPID is generally comprised of 12
digits, including a 7 digit LDN (Local
Directory Number). Be sure to enter the
different SPID number in each of the
A1 and A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2,
depending on the number of lines you
use) text boxes if you have entered the
separate LDNs in the Local Number
text boxes for each channel in step 3.
For the AT&T 5ESS (National
ISDN) switch type
Enter the SPID in the A1 text box
only.
5
After the settings are completed,
select “Save”, then press the ENTER
button.
Annotation Setup Menu
The Annotation setup menu is used for the
annotation function allowing you to write
letters or graphics on the screen using a pen
tablet.
Annotation
Annotation
Enable
Allows you to select whether the annotation
function is enabled.
On: Enables the annotation function.
Off: Disables the annotation function.
Color
Allows you to select the color of the letters
or graphics written on the screen with a pen
tablet.
You can select from among “Black”, “Red”,
“Blue”, “Green”, “Yellow”, “Orange”,
“Purple” and “White”.
Line Density
Allows you to select the density of the line
written on the screen with a pen tablet.
You can select from among “Thick”,
“Medium” and “Thin”.
For the NTI DMS-100 (National
ISDN), NTI DMS-100 (Custom
ISDN), AT&T 5ESS (National ISDN)
switch type
Enter the different SPID numbers in
the A1 and A2 text boxes.
Registering Local Information
73
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Enter the same LDNs in the A1 and
A2 (B1 and B2, C1 and C2, depending
on the number of lines you use) text
boxes.
For the AT&T 5ESS (Point-to-Point
Custom ISDN) switch type
You do not need to set up the SPID,
then no entry in the A1 and A2 (B1
and B2, C1 and C2, depending on the
number of lines you use) is required.
Camera Setup Menu
Camera
Camera
General Setup Menu
General1
Device Setup
Terminal Name
Input the local terminal name transmitted to
a remote party (up to 30 characters).
Standby Mode
Allows you to select whether the
Communication System enters standby
mode if it is idle for a specified period of
time.
On: Allows the System to go on standby.
Off: Does not allow the System to go on
standby.
Standby Time
Specify the time the system must remain idle
before entering the standby mode. This time
can be set between 1 and 99 minutes.
For details on the standby mode, see
“Standby Mode Function” on page 36.
Last Number Registration
Allows you to select whether to register the
remote party in the Phone Book after the
communication ends.
Off: The registration of the remote party
does not take place.
On: If the remote party is not registered in
the Phone Book, the message “Register
this participant in the list?” appears on
the monitor screen when communication
ends. When you select “OK”, the List
Edit menu opens.
74
Registering Local Information
Control by Far End
When “Far End Camera Control” is set to
“On” in the Communication setup menu,
you can temporarily reject the camera
control command transmitted by the remote
party.
On: Accepts the camera control command.
Off: Rejects the camera control command.
Language
Allows you to select the menu and display
language used by the system. You can select
from the following languages: English,
French, German, Japanese, Spanish, Italian,
Simplified Chinese, Portuguese, Traditional
Chinese, Korean, Dutch, Danish, Swedish,
Finnish, Polish, Russian, Arabic, Thai,
Norwegian, Turkish, Welsh, Czech and
Hungarian.
Note
Menu displays may be in English for some
languages.
General2
Clock Set
NTP
Allows you to select whether to obtain clock
information from the server with NTP.
On: Obtains clock information from the
server.
Off: Does not obtain clock information from
the server.
Primary NTP Server
Enter the address of the primary NTP server
from which the clock information is
obtained.
Secondary NTP Server
Enter the address of the secondary NTP
server from which the clock information is
obtained.
Time Zone
Allows you to select the country or region
where you are using the Communication
System.
Clock Display Pattern
Allows you to select the display pattern of
the clock.
You can select from among “Year/Month/
Day”, “Month/Day/Year”, “Day/Month/
Year”, “Year-Month-Day” and
“Day.Month.Year”.
Communication Mode Display
On: Displays the communication mode
when the system is connected to the
remote site.
Off: Does not display the communication
mode when the system is connected to
the remote site.
Date
Enter the current date (year/month/day).
Display On-Screen Keyboard
On: Displays the on-screen keyboard.
Off: Does not display the on-screen
keyboard.
Time Update
Selecting “Execute” and pressing the
ENTER button on the Remote Commander
updates the clock setting when “NTP” is set
to “On”.
General3
Menu Screens
Allows you to select whether to display the
items of the Tools and Setup menus.
For details on the on-screen keyboard, see
“Entering Characters Using the On-Screen
Keyboard” on page 52.
Menu Transparency
Allows you to select the degree of
transparency of the superimposed menu
display over the background picture. You
can select from among “High”, “Medium”
and “Low”.
General4
Display Time in Communication
Off: Displays neither the elapsed nor current
time during communication.
Time Display: Displays the elapsed time
during communication.
Current Time: Displays the current time
during communication.
Display Terminal Name
Off: Does not display the connected
terminal names.
Always show: Always displays the
connected terminal names.
Show temporarily: Displays the connected
terminal names for a brief moment.
Guide
On: Displays the instruction that guides the
operation.
Off: Does not display the instructions.
Display Indicator
On: Displays the indicators such as
“Memory Stick” and tablet.
Off: Does not display the indicators.
Function Keys in
Communication
Allows you to switch the picture with one
press of a button on the Remote
Commander.
You can set the function to be assigned to
each of the F1 to F4 (function) buttons.
Note
You cannot set “Function Keys in
Communication” during communication. Set
this item before starting communication.
F1
Allows you to select the video input
switched by pressing the F1 button on the
Remote Commander. You can select from
among “Far/Near”, “Camera”, “RGB”, and
“No Operation”.
This item is preset to “Far/Near” at the
factory. This setting allows you to switch the
cameras to be controlled between the local
and remote sites during communication by
pressing the F1 button on the Remote
Commander.
Registering Local Information
75
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Time
Set the current clock.
Note
Even if “F1” is set to any option other than
“Far/Near”, “F1” is fixed to “Far/Near”
while the Video Input or Layout menu is
displayed on the screen. In some other cases,
the function of the F1 to F4 buttons may be
fixed regardless of the setting for practical
convenience, in which case the functions of
the button are shown in the instruction
display.
F2
Allows you to select the video input
switched by pressing the F2 button on the
Remote Commander. You can select from
among “Camera”, “RGB”, and “No
Operation”.
F3
Allows you to select the video input
switched by pressing the F3 button on the
Remote Commander. You can select from
among “Camera”, “RGB”, “Zoom (RGB)”
and “No Operation”.
When “Zoom (RGB)” is selected, a 4:3
aspect ratio picture will be enlarged.
F4
Allows you to select the video input
switched by pressing the F4 button on the
Remote Commander. You can select from
among “Camera”, “RGB”, and “No
Operation”.
Home Menu Setup Menu
Home Menu1
Home Menu1
Allows you to select the items that show or
hide in/from the Home menu.
Note
Some items may not be set during
communication.
Clock Display
On: Allows display of the current time in the
Home menu.
Off: Does not display the current time.
76
Registering Local Information
Local Terminal Name
On: Displays the local terminal name in the
Home menu.
Off: Does not display the local terminal
name.
Number Display
Allows you to select the identification of the
local system, such as the IP address and user
name, to be displayed in the Home menu.
SIP:User Name: Displays the user name
registered in the SIP server.
SIP:Address: Displays the SIP address.
GK:User Alias: Displays the user name
registered in the gatekeeper when you
use the gatekeeper.
GK:User Number: Displays the user
number registered in the gatekeeper
when you use the gatekeeper.
NAT:Address: Displays the NAT address
when you connect the system to a
network using NAT.
IP: Address: Displays the IP address.
No display: Does not display any
identification, such as the IP and user
name, for the system.
Terminal Status
On: Displays the local terminal status in the
Home menu.
Off: Does not display the local terminal
status.
Warning Messages
On: Displays a warning message in the
Home menu when an abnormality
occurs.
Off: Does not display a warning message.
Home Menu2
Home Menu2
Allows you to select whether to display the
menu buttons in the Home menu.
Connect Button Display
Select the buttons for connection to be
displayed in the Home menu.
Simple: Displays “Connect” button only.
Individual: Selects whether to display
“Phone Book”, “History” or “Detailed
Dial” depending on the setting of each
button.
Off: Does not display the buttons for
connection.
Off: Does not display the current audio input
level.
Phone Book Button
On: Displays “Phone Book”.
Off: Does not display “Phone Book”.
Volume
On: Displays the volume meter for a certain
duration when the volume is adjusted.
Off: Does not display the volume meter.
History Button
On: Displays “History”.
Off: Does not display “History”.
Camera Button
On: Displays “Camera”.
Off: Does not display “Camera”.
Tools Button
Off: Does not display “Tools”.
On: Displays “Tools”.
One-Touch Dial
On: Displays the one-touch dial buttons.
Off: Does not display the one-touch dial
buttons.
Direct Dial
Off: Does not display “Dial” and the text
box for direct dialing.
On: Displays “Dial” and the text box for
direct dialing.
ISDN Status
On: Displays the currently used ISDN unit
port.
Off: Does not display the currently used
ISDN unit port.
Administrator Setup Menu
The Administrator setup menu is used for
the system administrators.
Administrator1 Password
By registering the password in this menu, you
can restrict user access from the system or the
Web page to the setup menus and Phone
Books, and prevent their modification.
Note
Home Menu3
Home Menu3
Allows you to select whether to display the
indicators (status information) in the Home
menu.
Video Input Display
On: Displays the current video input name.
Off: Does not display the current video input
name.
Audio Input Display
On: Displays the current audio input.
Off: Does not display the current audio
input.
Audio Level Meter
On: Displays the current audio input level.
If a password is not enabled, anyone will be
able to access the system using the respective
user name. Be sure to configure all of the
passwords to prevent unauthorized third parties
on the network from accessing the system.
For details on when each password is used
for authorization in the Web page, see
“Chapter 8: Web Control Function”.
Administrator Password
Use up to 8 alphanumeric characters and
symbols to register the password used by the
system administrator.
When you register an Administrator
Password, a password prompt will appear
when you access the Administrator setup
menu. In addition, the Administrator
Password can be used as the main password
Registering Local Information
77
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Detailed Dial Button
On: Displays “Detailed Dial”.
Off: Does not display “Detailed Dial”.
LAN Status
On: Displays the current status of LAN
connection.
Off: Does not display the current status of
LAN connection.
if multiple passwords are registered. For
example, if the Phone Book Modification
Password, Save Settings Password, and
Administrator Password are registered, the
Administrator Password can be used to
modify Phone Books and settings.
Notes
• After you enter the Administrator Password to
modify settings or Phone Books, unless you
switch to a different screen from the setup
menu or Phone Book screen, modification will
be enabled without password reentry. In
addition, modification will be enabled without
password reentry for about 2 minutes after
returning to the Home menu from the setup
menu or Phone Book. The same applies when
you access the Administrator setup menu.
• Registering only the Administrator Password
will not enable password protection for
settings and Phone Book modification.
Always register the Phone Book Modification
Password and the Save Settings Password in
addition to the Administrator Password.
• Be aware that registering other passwords
but leaving the Administrator Password
blank allows for modification and
connection from the Web page without
password input.
• Make sure to write down the Administrator
Password. If you should forget the
Administrator Password, consult your Sony
dealer. In this case, the memory of the
Communication System is initialized before
repair, and the data in the Phone Book and
History lists, as well as various setting data,
are erased.
Phone Book Modification Password
Use up to 8 alphanumeric characters and
symbols to register the password used for
Phone Book modifications.
Note
After you enter the Phone Book Modification
Password to modify Phone Books, unless you
switch to a different screen from the Phone
Book, modification will be enabled without
password reentry. In addition, modification
will be enabled without password reentry for
about 2 minutes after returning to the Home
menu from the Phone Book.
78
Registering Local Information
Save Settings Password
Use up to 8 alphanumeric characters and
symbols to register the password used for
saving settings.
Note
After you enter the Save Settings Password to
modify settings, unless you switch to a different
screen from the setup menu, modification will be
enabled without password reentry. In addition,
modification will be enabled without password
reentry for about 2 minutes after returning to the
Home menu from the setup menu.
Remote Access Password
Use up to 8 alphanumeric characters and
symbols to register the password used for
accessing the Web page.
Streaming Broadcast Password
Use up to 8 alphanumeric characters and
symbols to register the password used when
receiving and viewing video and audio
streams from PCS terminals on the Web page.
Administrator2 Setup Password1
Allows you to select whether to require “Save
Settings Password” when saving each setting.
Line Interface
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings
Password” when saving the Line
Interface settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Line Interface settings.
Dial
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Dial setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Dial setup settings.
Answer
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Answer setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Answer setup settings.
Multipoint
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Multipoint settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Multipoint settings.
IP Mode
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the IP Mode settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the IP Mode settings.
ISDN Mode
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the ISDN Mode settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the ISDN Mode settings.
Administrator3 Setup Password2
Audio
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Audio setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Audio setup settings.
ISDN
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the ISDN setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the ISDN setup settings.
Administrator4 Setup Password3
General
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the General setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the General setup settings.
Home Menu
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Home Menu setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Home Menu setup
settings.
Video
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Video setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Video setup settings.
Administrator
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings
Password” when saving the
Administrator setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Administrator setup
settings.
LAN
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the LAN setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the LAN setup settings.
Annotation
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Annotation setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Annotation setup settings.
QoS
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the QoS setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the QoS setup settings.
Camera
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Camera setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Camera setup settings.
TOS
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the TOS setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the TOS setup settings.
Encryption
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the Encryption setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Encryption setup settings.
Registering Local Information
79
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
SIP Mode
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the SIP Mode settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the SIP Mode settings.
SIP
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings Password”
when saving the SIP setup settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the SIP setup settings.
Shared Phone Book
Enabled: Requires “Save Settings
Password” when saving the Shared
Phone Book settings.
Disabled: Does not require the password
when saving the Shared Phone Book
settings.
Administrator5 Streaming/
Recording
Streaming
Select whether to enable the streaming broadcast.
Enabled: Permits the streaming broadcast.
Disabled: Does not permit the streaming
broadcast of a videoconference.
Recording
Select whether to enable the recording of
video and audio to a “Memory Stick.”
Enabled: Permits the recording.
Disabled: Does not permit the recording.
Video
Select a bit rate for streaming and recording
video.
Off: Disables the streaming and recording of
video.
64Kbps: Streams and records video at
64 Kbps.
128Kbps: Streams and records video at
128 Kbps.
384Kbps: Streams and records video at
384 Kbps.
512Kbps: Streams and records video at
512 Kbps.
Note
When “Off” is selected, only audio can be
streamed and recorded.
Multicast Address
Enter the multicast address for streaming
broadcasts.
Note
You can enter the unicast address in this menu.
If you set the unicast address, enter two or more
different numbers in “Audio Port Number” and
“Video Port Number” for streaming broadcasts.
80
Registering Local Information
Audio Port Number
Enter the audio port number for streaming
broadcasts.
Video Port Number
Enter the video port number for streaming
broadcasts.
HOP
Enter a number from 0 to 255 as the HOP for
streaming broadcasts.
Administrator6 Access Permit
Note
Depending on the operating environment,
unauthorized third parties on the network may be
able to access the system. When you set “Web
Monitor”, “Web Access”, “Telnet Access”, or
“SSH Access” to “On” or “Enabled”, the
following confirmation screen will appear.
To confirm the change in the setting, select
“Accept” and configure all of the passwords on
the Password page (page 77) of the
Administrator setup menu. The setting will not
be changed if you select “Cancel”.
Web Monitor
Allows you to permit the monitoring
communication status through a Web
browser (automatic update of JPEG images).
On: Permits monitoring with a Web browser.
Off: Does not permit monitoring with a Web
browser.
Web Access
Select whether to permit access to the
Communication System via a Web browser.
Enabled: Permits access via a Web browser.
Disabled: Prohibits access via a Web browser.
Telnet Access
Select whether to permit access to the
Communication System via Telnet.
Enabled: Permits access via Telnet.
Disabled: Prohibits access via Telnet.
SSH Access
Allows you to select whether to permit
access to the Communication System via
SSH (Secure Shell).
Enabled: Permits access via SSH.
Disabled: Prohibits access via SSH
Administrator7 Other
Save Setup
Saves the data for each setting to a “Memory
Stick”. The data for each setting saved on the
“Memory Stick” is overwritten.
HOP
Enter a number from 0 to 255 as the HOP
Display Terminal Name.
Auto Restore
Allows you to select whether to
automatically turn on the Communication
System if an power interruption occurs and
is then restored.
On: Enables the Auto Restore function.
Off: Disables the Auto Restore function.
Internet Protocol
IPv4: Uses the internet protocol version 4
(IPv4) that is commonly used.
IPv6: Uses the next-generation internet
protocol version 6 (IPv6).
IPv4/IPv6: Uses both IPv4 and IPv6.
Note
Note
Phone Book and History data are not saved.
Load Setup
Loads the data for each setting from a
“Memory Stick”. The data for each setting
saved on the System is overwritten.
Note
When saving and loading settings, make sure
that the version of the system from which the
data was originally saved is the same as the
version of the local system. If the versions
differ, the data may not be properly recognized.
AMX Device Discovery
Select whether to export AMX Device
Discovery information onto the network.
Off: Disables this function.
On: Enables this function.
When the AMX system is connected to the
Communication System via serial
connection, AMX Device Discovery
information is output via that serial
connection.
AMX systems are external control devices
that can be used to control the
Communication System. When the AMX
system receives Device Discovery
When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv6” or
“IPv4/IPv6”, some of the functions of this
system are restricted, and some of the
Administrator setup menus are not displayed.
For details, see “Restrictions on the Use of
IPv6” on page 87.
Administrator8 Phone Book
Save Phone Book
Allows you to save the data in the Phone
Book on a “Memory Stick”. The data
already stored on the “Memory Stick” is
overwritten.
Load Phone Book
Allows you to load the data in the Phone
Book from a “Memory Stick.” The data
already stored in the Phone Book is
overwritten.
Note
When loading Phone Book data, make sure that
the version of the system from which the data
was originally saved is the same as the version
of the local system. If the versions differ, the
data may not be properly recognized.
Registering Local Information
81
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Use History
Select whether to display the history lists in
order to use for dialing, etc.
On: Displays the history lists.
Off: Does not display the history lists.
information from the Communication
System, the System automatically falls
under the control of the AMX system.
Clear Phone Book
Allows you to delete a Phone Book on the
system.
Auto Dialing
Allows you to select whether to
automatically dial a specified remote party
in the Private Phone Book created in a
“Memory Stick”, when the “Memory Stick”
is inserted.
On: Enables the Auto Dialing function.
Off: Disables the Auto Dialing function.
For details, see “To dial a specified remote
party in a Private Phone Book
automatically” on page 120.
Create Private Phone Book
Allows you to create an empty folder and
file for a Private Phone Book on a “Memory
Stick” inserted into the system.
For details, see “Creating a Private Phone
Book” on page 119.
Delete Private Phone Book
Allows you to delete the Private Phone Book
on a “Memory Stick” inserted into the
system.
Copy to Private Phone Book
Allows you to copy the entire contents of the
Phone Book to a Private Phone Book on a
“Memory Stick” inserted into the system.
Encryption Setup Menu
The Encryption setup menu is used to
connect to a remote party using the
encryption function.
The encryption function allows you to hold
a strictly confidential connection.
For details on an encrypted connection, see
Chapter 5.
Encryption
Encryption
Encryption Mode
Select whether you use the encryption
feature.
Off: Disables use of the encryption feature.
82
Registering Local Information
Connect Priority: Connects with the
encryption feature to a remote party with
standard encrypted connection enabled.
Connects without the encryption feature
to a remote party with standard
encrypted connection disabled or with
the encryption feature set to off.
Encrypt Priority: Connects only to a
remote party with standard encrypted
connection enabled.
Shared Phone Book Setup
Menu
This menu is used to configure the settings
when using the Shared Phone Book located
on the server.
For details on the Shared Phone Book, see
“Using the Shared Phone Book” on page
121.
Shared Phone Book
Shared Phone
Book
SPB Mode
Selects whether to use the server managing
the Shared Phone Book.
On: Enables use of the server managing the
Shared Phone Book.
Off: Disables use of the server managing the
Shared Phone Book.
SPB Server Address
Enter the IP address for the server managing
the Shared Phone Book.
SPB Server Password
Enter the password for the server managing
the Shared Phone Book.
Displaying the Machine Status
The Machine Status menu allows display of the versions, communication
mode, line connection quality, etc. of the Communication System and the
connected equipment.
Displaying the Machine Status Menu
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander or use the V, v, B or
b button to select “Tools”, then press the ENTER button.
The Tools menu appears,
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Machine
Status”, then press the ENTER button.
The Machine Status menu appears.
Machine Status
Home
Machine Information
Peripheral Status
Back to Tools
Communication Mode Status
LAN Line Status
Network Routing Check
Information screens enabled for display by the Machine Status
menu
Machine Information (see page 85)
Peripheral Status (see page 85)
Communication Mode Status (see page 85)
LAN Line Status (see page 86)
Network Routing Check (see page 86)
Displaying the Machine Status
83
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
1
3
84
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
information to be displayed, then press the ENTER button.
The selected display appears.
Displaying the Machine Status
Machine Information
The Machine Information menu shows the
versions of the HD Visual Communication
System and the connected equipment for
exclusive use, installed software versions,
etc.
Host Version
Displays the software version of the HD
Visual Communication System.
Option I/F
Displays the optional connected equipment.
None: No optional equipment is connected.
ISDN (B768): The PCSA-B768S ISDN
Unit is connected.
ISDN (B384): The PCSA-B384S ISDN
Unit is connected.
Tablet: Pen tablet (Bamboo small CTH470/K0 manufactured by Wacom Co.,
Ltd.) is connected.
Host Name
Displays the host name.
IP Address
Displays the IP address for LAN.
Note
When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4/IPv6”
in the Administrator setup menu, both IPv4 and
IPv6 IP addresses are displayed.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address for LAN.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number.
Selecting “Next” in the Machine
Information menu shows the codec version,
etc.
Peripheral Status
Video Input
Displays the input video name.
Audio Input (MIC)
Displays microphone input name.
Audio Input (AUX)
Displays the external audio input name.
Video Output
Displays the video output size and the
50 Hz/60 Hz setting of “Frequency”.
Audio Output
Displays the audio output equipped with this
system.
LAN Mode
Displays the LAN Mode for LAN.
Gatekeeper
Displays the status of registration to
gatekeeper with the following messages:
Gatekeeper Requested, Gatekeeper
Confirmed, Gatekeeper Reject, Registration
Requested, Registration Confirmed,
Registration Failed, Registration Rejected,
Registration Timeout, Unregistration
Requested and Unregistration Confirmed.
Communication Mode Status
The Communication Mode Status menu
shows the status of current communication
when communication is in progress, and the
status of previous communications when
communication is not in progress.
The ISDN Line Status, LAN Line Status or
LAN Connection Status will also be
displayed depending on the line interface
used.
Displaying the Machine Status
85
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Software Option
Displays the optional software installed.
None: No software is installed.
Presentation: The Communication System
is equipped with the HD Data Solution
software preinstalled.
Multipoint: The Communication System is
equipped with the HD MCU software
preinstalled.
Machine version
Communication Mode Status
The current communication status will be
displayed. When two points are connected to
the system, selecting “Next” in the lower
part of the page displays the next page.
For the items described with both “(Encode)”
and “(Decode)”, the descriptions under
“(Encode)” show the setting status of the local
system and those under “(Decode)” show the
status of the receiving.
Far End Terminal Name
Displays the terminal name of a remote
party.
Remote Address
Displays the address of a remote party.
Audio Mode
Displays the current audio encoding format.
Video Mode
Displays the current video encoding format.
“H.264 HP” appears during H.264 High
Profile communication, and “H.264”
appears during H.264 Baseline Profile
communication. However, these do not
appear in 1080 Mode.
Note
The audio encoding and video encoding
formats used for communication with a remote
party may differ from the settings in this menu,
depending on the status of the system on the
remote site.
Frame Rate
Displays the maximum frame rate of motion
pictures.
Rate
Displays in real time the number of
connected lines and their transfer rates.
Line I/F
Displays the line interface being used.
Camera Control
Displays whether the unit is ready to operate
both cameras.
86
Displaying the Machine Status
H239
Displays whether the unit is ready to use the
H.239 presentation mode.
Check Code
Displays the encryption check code.
LAN Line Status
The LAN line status will be displayed on
one page for each point connected to the
system. The connected point is shown at the
upper left corner of each page. Selecting
“Next” in the lower part of the page displays
the next page.
Bit rate - Encode
Displays by category (audio, video and
H.239 (presentation)) the transfer rates for
sending data.
Bit rate - Decode
Displays by category (audio, video and
H.239 (presentation)) the transfer rates for
receiving data.
Number of lost packets
Displays by category (audio, video and
H.239 (presentation)) the number of packets
lost during transfer on the network.
Number of recovered packets
Displays by category (audio, video and
H.239 (presentation)) the number of lost
packets that were recovered with the
system’s QoS function.
Number of received packets
Displays by category (audio, video and
H.239 (presentation)) the number of packets
received during communication.
Network Routing Check
The Network Routing Check menu is used to
check the network routing, and it shows the
checking results.
You can start the network routing check by
selecting “Start Measurement” in the lower
part of the menu.
For details, see “About the Network Routing
Check” on page 96.
IP address of remote site
Enter the IP address of the remote terminal
you want to check.
Line I/F
LAN: Select to perform the routing check
for the network connected to the
connector.
ping
Displays the results of check for
reachability, packet loss, RTT (Round-Trip
Time) and H.323 (H.323 communication
availability).
traceroute
Displays the results of check for HOP
(number of routers passed through to reach
the remote site) and total RTT.
The functions of the system are restricted as
follows when using the IPv6 Internet
Protocol or both the IPv4 and IPv6 Internet
Protocols.
Unusable functions with IPv6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNMP Mode*
NTP
Shared Phone Book*
TOS*
Network Routing Check*
AMX Device Discovery*
PPPoE
Streaming
NAT
SIP
* Usable with IPv4 when using both IPv4 and
IPv6.
Start Measurement
Select this button to start a network routing
check.
Previous
Select this button to restore the Machine
Status menu.
Restrictions on the Use of IPv6
87
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Gateway
Displays the results of check for the default
gateway.
Restrictions on the
Use of IPv6
Setting Up the Network Configurations
This section describes how to set up the network configurations for use with
various networks.
For details on the LAN setup menu, see “LAN Setup Menu” (page 66).
For details on configurations, consult with the system administrator.
LAN Connection via DHCP
Configuration example
LAN (A)
LAN (B)
DHCP Server 1
Set “DHCP Mode” to “Auto” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup
menu.
Setup
LAN
Basic Setup
LAN1
Host Name
DHCP Mode
Auto
IP Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
LAN Mode
Auto
Save
Cancel
The setting has been configured properly if the IP address appears in the Home
menu.
To connect to a remote party
Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.
88
Setting Up the Network Configurations
LAN Connection through a Router
Configuration example
LAN (B)
Virtual Private
Network (VPN)
LAN (A)
192.100.10.1
Router
192.100.20.1
Router
192.100.10.10
Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup
menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”,
and “Gateway Address”.
Setup
LAN
Basic Setup
LAN1
Host Name
Sony
DHCP Mode
Off
IP Address
192.100. 10. 10
Network Mask
255.255.255. 0
Gateway Address
192.100. 10. 1
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
LAN Mode
Auto
Save
Cancel
The setting has been configured properly if the correct IP address appears in
the Home menu.
To connect to a remote party
Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.
Setting Up the Network Configurations
89
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
192.100.20.20
LAN Connection through a Gatekeeper
Configuration example
LAN (A)
LAN (B)
192.100.10.1
192.100.20.1
Router
192.100.10.10
User alias: PCS-A
User number: 100
1
Router
192.100.20.20
User alias: PCS-B
User number: 200
Gatekeeper
192.100.10.20
Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup
menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”,
and “Gateway Address”.
Setup
LAN
Basic Setup
LAN1
Host Name
Sony
DHCP Mode
Off
IP Address
192.100. 10. 10
Network Mask
255.255.255. 0
Gateway Address
192.100. 10. 1
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Auto
LAN Mode
Save
2
Cancel
Set “Gatekeeper Mode” to “On” under the Gatekeeper page of the LAN
setup menu, and enter the appropriate values for “Gatekeeper Address”,
“User Alias”, and “User Number”.
Setup
LAN
Gatekeeper
LAN4
Gatekeeper Mode
On
Gatekeeper Address
192.100. 10. 20
User Alias
PCS-A
User Number
100
H.460
Off
Save
Cancel
The IP address registered is displayed in the Home menu.
90
Setting Up the Network Configurations
To connect to a remote party
Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the user name or user number set by the
remote party, and dial.
LAN Connection through NAT
Connection using NAT allows one IP address to be shared by several
computers on the same LAN. This section describes how to set up visual
communication in NAT and global IP environments.
210.10.10.1
192.100.10.1
210.20.20.1
Internet
Router
Router
210.20.20.2
(Global address)
192.100.10.10
1
Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup
menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”,
and “Gateway Address”.
Setup
LAN
Basic Setup
LAN1
Host Name
Sony
DHCP Mode
Off
IP Address
192.100. 10. 10
Network Mask
255.255.255. 0
Gateway Address
192.100. 10. 1
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
LAN Mode
Auto
Save
2
Cancel
Set “NAT Mode” to “On” in the NAT Setup page of the LAN setup menu,
and enter the appropriate IP address in “WAN IP Address”.
Setting Up the Network Configurations
91
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Configuration example
IP:192.168.0.11
Setup
LAN
5/11/2008 13:00
NAT Setup
LAN3
NAT Mode
On
WAN IP Address
210. 10. 10. 1
Save
Cancel
The setting has been configured properly if the correct WAN IP address
appears in the Home menu.
To display the NAT address in the Home menu, you must set “Number
Display” to “NAT:Address” in the Home Menu1 page of the Home Menu
setup menu (page 76).
3
Remote parties must configure the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup
menu in the same way.
Note
Remote parties do not need to configure the settings in the NAT Setup page of the
LAN setup menu as they are not in a NAT environment.
To connect to a remote party
Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.
Note
When using the terminal in the NAT environment, you can connect to a remote party
(global IP), but for a remote party to connect to you, you must configure your router
settings. For details on router settings, consult with the system administrator.
LAN Connection with H.460 Firewall Traversal
You can use H.460 to traverse firewalls and connect with the terminals on
other networks.
92
Setting Up the Network Configurations
Configuration example
192.200.20.1
192.100.10.1
Internet
Router
Router
Traversal
server
192.200.20.10
210.20.20.10
(Global address)
1
Enter a name in “Host Name” under the Basic Setup page in the LAN setup
menu, and enter the appropriate values for “IP Address”, “Network Mask”,
and “Gateway Address”.
Setup
LAN
Basic Setup
LAN1
Host Name
Sony
DHCP Mode
Off
IP Address
192.100. 10. 10
Network Mask
255.255.255. 0
Gateway Address
192.100. 10. 1
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Auto
LAN Mode
Save
2
Cancel
Set “H.460” to “On” under the Gatekeeper page of the LAN setup menu.
Set “Gatekeeper Mode” to “On” and enter the appropriate value for
“Gatekeeper Address”.
Setup
LAN
Gatekeeper
LAN 4
Gatekeeper Mode
On
Gatekeeper Address
210. 20. 20. 10
User Alias
PCS-A
User Number
100
H.460
On
Save
Cancel
The IP address registered is displayed in the Home menu.
To conduct a video conference
Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.
Setting Up the Network Configurations
93
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
192.100.10.10
User Alias: PCS-A
User Number: 100
LAN Connection Using PPPoE
When using PPPoE, you can connect via LAN without a router.
A modem (using bridge mode) is required when using FLET’S ADSL.
Configuration example
B FLET’S
Internet
Local IP
network
ONU
B FLET’S
ONU
211.10.10.10
210.10.10.10
1
Set “PPPoE” to “On” under the PPPoE page in the LAN setup menu, and
enter the PPPoE user name and PPPoE password given to you by the
provider.
Setup
LAN
PPPoE
LAN1
PPPoE
On
User Alias
Sony@aaa.ne.jp
Password
abcdefg
Fixed IP for PPPoE
On
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE 210. 10. 10. 10
DNS
Obtain automatically
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Save
2
Cancel
If you have a fixed IP from the provider, set “Fixed IP for PPPoE” to “On”,
and enter your fixed IP address for PPPoE in “Fixed IP Address for
PPPoE” under the PPPoE page in the LAN setup menu.
The setting has been configured properly if the correct IP address appears
in the Home menu.
Note
If the fixed DNS server address is specified by the provider, set “DNS” to
“Specify”, and enter the specific addresses in “Primary DNS” and “Secondary
DNS”.
3
94
Remote parties must configure in the same way.
Setting Up the Network Configurations
To connect to a remote party
Select “IP” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s IP address, and dial.
ISDN Connections
1
Enter the appropriate numbers for “Area Code” and “Local Number” in the
Telephone Number page of the ISDN setup menu.
Note
For details on the ISDN setup menu, see “ISDN Setup Menu” (page 71).
For details on configurations, consult with the system administrator.
Setup
ISDN
Number
ISDN2
Area Code
Local Number
A1
A2
B3
B2
C1
C2
Execute
Auto SPID
Save
Cancel
The setting has been configured properly if the correct line number appears
in the Home menu.
2
Remote parties must configure in the same way.
Note
When connecting to the ISDN unit, use the ports in ascending order.
Yes: 1, 2, 3…
No: 1, 6, 5…
To connect to a remote party
Select “ISDN” under “Line I/F”, enter the remote party’s line number, and
dial.
For details on how to start a visual communication, see “Starting a
Connection by Calling a Remote Party” (page 97).
Setting Up the Network Configurations
95
Chapter 2: Registration and Setup for System Administrators
Do not enter the first 0 of the area code.
About the Network Routing Check
Before connecting a remote system, you can check the network routing to
assure smooth connection with the system.
For the network routing check, knowledge of network is required. Consult your
network administrator or Sony dealer.
If you have any questions about the checked result, consult your network
administrator or Sony dealer.
To start the network routing check
Open the Network Routing Check menu of the Machine Status menu on the
local system that performs the routing check, then set the necessary items on
the menu.
Select “Start Measurement” to start the network routing check.
Machine Status > Network Routing Check
IP Address of Remote Site
Gateway
ping
Network Routing Check
traceroute
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Result
Result
Packet Loss (%)
RTT
H.323 Communication
HOP
Total RTT
Start Measurement
End
For the procedure how to open the Network Routing Check menu, see
“Displaying the Machine Status” on page 83.
Note
While the network routing check is being performed, you cannot use any other functions
including communication. When the routing check is complete, the checked results are
displayed on the Network Routing Check menu.
96
About the Network Routing Check
Chapter 3: Basic
Connection
This chapter describes how to connect to a remote party after the administrator
has completed various registrations and settings for the system.
The chapter explains a point-to-point communication via a LAN connection,
ISDN connection using the optional PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN
Unit or SIP.
For use of optional equipment, see Chapter 4.
To conduct an encrypted communication, see Chapter 5.
Starting a Connection by Calling a
Remote Party
You can start a communication with a remote party by dialing. Once you have
made a connection to the remote party, you can begin talking just as with a
normal phone call and start communication.
You can call a remote party using the various methods described below. Use
any one depending on the settings in the Home menu or connecting status.
• To call a remote party by using the Connect menu (page 99)
• To call a remote party by entering their address or number directly (Direct
Dial) (page 100)
• To call a remote party by using the one-touch dial buttons (page 101)
• To call a remote party by using the history list (page 102)
• To call a remote party registered in the Phone Book (page 103)
• To call a remote party not registered in the Phone Book by setting the
necessary items in the Detailed Dial menu (page 105)
Turning On the Power
1
Turn on any external equipment that will be used.
2
Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
97
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
To conduct a multipoint communication, see Chapter 6.
?/1 (power) switch
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
?/1 (power) indicator
The ?/1 (power) indicator on the Communication System flashes.
“Starting” appears on the bottom right of the monitor, and then the IPELA
logo appears.
When the system has finished starting up, the indicator remains steadily lit
in green.
The Home menu appears on the monitor screen and the picture shot by the
local camera also appears.
3
Check that the lens cover for the camera is open.
If it is closed, open it by sliding the lever for the lens cover at the top of the
system to the right.
Lever for lens cover
Camera
98
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
Calling a Remote Party by Using the Connect Menu
This method is available when the Connect button is displayed in the Home
menu.
AAA
Ready
Ready to connect.
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
5/11/2008 13:00
Home
Camera
Connect
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Connect”
in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button.
The Connect menu appears.
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
Previous
Enter Number/Address
Select from Phone Book
Connect
2
Select from History
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select how to
call a remote party, then press the ENTER button.
The menu screen will change according to the item you select.
Enter Number/Address: The Detailed Dial menu appears on the screen.
For the procedure to be followed, see “Calling a Remote Party Not
Registered in the Phone Book” on page 105.
Select from Phone Book: The Phone Book appears on the screen.
For the procedure to be followed, see “Calling a Remote Party Registered
in the Phone Book” on page 103.
Select from History: The history list appears on the screen.
For the procedure to be followed, see “Calling a Remote Party by
Selecting Them in the History List” on page 102.
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
99
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Connect button
.
Calling a Remote Party by Entering Their Address or Number
Directly (Direct Dial)
When “Direct Dial” is set to “On” in the Home Menu setup menu, the number
input box, Dial button, etc. are displayed in the Home menu, allowing you to
use the direct dial function.
AAA
Ready
Ready to connect.
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
5/11/2008 13:00
Home
IP
Dial
Line interface
Dial
Number input box
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Line I/
F” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the line
interface to be used, then press the ENTER button.
IP: Connects to the system on the remote site via a LAN connected to the
(LAN) connector.
ISDN: Connects to the system on the remote site via an ISDN line.
TEL: Connects to a phone on the remote site via an ISDN line for a voice
meeting.
Note
When a checkmark is put to “SIP” under “Line Interface” of the Line Interface setup
menu, you can select “SIP” from the line interface select box.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
number input box, then press the ENTER button.
4
Enter the remote party’s IP address or line number with the number buttons
on the Remote Commander, then press the ENTER button.
Note
The format of the address for a SIP connection is the following:
• 4000 (number assigned by the SIP server)
• 4000@sip.com
• 192.168.1.1 (when the IP address and SIP server are not used)
100
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
5
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or use the
V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial”, then press
the ENTER button.
The system begins dialing the IP address or telephone number entered in
step 4. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen.
When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Session
Connected.” appears on the screen and the picture on the remote site is
displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.
Picture on the local site
Picture on the remote site
Calling a Remote Party Using the One-Touch Dial Buttons
When “One-Touch Dial” is set to “On” in the Home Menu setup menu, the
one-touch dial buttons are displayed in the Home menu, allowing you to use
the one-touch dial function.
For registration of the one-touch dial buttons, see “Registering a Remote
Party – Phone Book” on page 112.
1
Open the Home menu.
2
Select the one-touch dial button for which the remote party you want to call
is registered with one of the F1 to F4 buttons on the Remote Commander.
Or select the one-touch dial button you want to call in the Home menu by
pressing the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, then press the
ENTER button. Select “Connect” from the displayed submenu with the V,
v, B or b button, and press the ENTER button.
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
101
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
To cancel dialing before connecting with the remote party
While “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT
( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
AAA
Ready
Ready to connect.
IP:XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
5/11/2008 13:00
Home
Camera
Tools
F1
Room 101
History
F2
F3
Room 201
Office A
F4
Office E
Phone Book
IP
Detailed Dial
Dial
One-touch dial buttons
The system begins dialing the selected remote party. “Dialing” appears on
the monitor screen. When the system connects to the remote system,
“Session Connected.” appears on the screen and the picture on the remote
site is displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.
To cancel dialing before connecting with the remote party
While “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT
( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
Calling a Remote Party by Selecting Them in the History List
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “History”
in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select “Connect” in
the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button to
display the Connect menu, then select “Select from History”.
The History menu appears.
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
History
Home
Phone Book
Detailed Dial
Dial
Dial History1
111.111.111.112
Answer
Dial History2
555-555-555
2008/05/26 00:00 (03:25:45)
Missed Call
Dial History3
17.17.17.17
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:17)
Dial History4
18.18.18.18
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:18)
Dial History5
19.19.19.19
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:19)
Dial History6
20.20.20.20
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:20)
Dial History7
66.66.66.66
2008/05/26 00:08 (00:00:00)
Dial History8
88.88.88.88
2008/05/26 00:08 (01:00:06)
2008/05/01 00:00 (12:34:56)
Note
You can display the History menu by selecting “History” from the Phone Book or
Detailed Dial menu.
102
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Dial
(outgoing call history)”, “Answer (incoming call history)” or “Missed Call
(incoming call history in absence)”, then press the ENTER button or b
button.
The selected history list appears.
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
History
Home
Phone Book
Detailed Dial
Dial
Dial History1
111.111.111.112
Answer
Dial History2
555-555-555
2008/05/26 00:00 (03:25:45)
Missed Call
Dial History3
17.17.17.17
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:17)
Dial History4
18.18.18.18
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:18)
Dial History5
19.19.19.19
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:19)
Dial History6
20.20.20.20
2008/05/26 00:00 (01:00:20)
Dial History7
66.66.66.66
2008/05/26 00:08 (00:00:00)
Dial History8
88.88.88.88
2008/05/26 00:08 (01:00:06)
2008/05/01 00:00 (12:34:56)
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote
party you want to call.
4
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or press
the ENTER button to display the submenu, select “Connect” with the V, v,
B or b button, and press the ENTER button.
The system begins dialing the selected party. “Dialing” appears on the
monitor screen. When the system connects to the remote system, “Session
Connected.” appears on the screen and the picture on the remote site is
displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.
To cancel dialing before connecting with the remote party
While “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT
( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
Note
You can select the items below from the submenu:
“Cancel”: Cancels selection from the history list.
“Edit”: Displays the List Edit menu for registration in the Phone Book.
“Delete”: Deletes the selected call from the history list.
Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book
For the registration in the Phone Book, see “Registering a Remote Party –
Phone Book” on page 112.
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Phone
Book” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select
“Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER
button to display the Connect menu, then select “Select from Phone Book”.
The Phone Book appears on the monitor screen.
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
103
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
3
Phone Book
Home
Default Group
Group1
Group2
Room 101
Room 102
Office A
Group3
ISDN 01-2345-6789
IP 255.255.255.255
ISDN 98-7654-3210
Room 201
Room 202
Office E
IP 0.0.0.0
IP 123.456.789.012
ISDN 01-2345-6789
New Entry
Group4
Group Edit
Group5
Group6
Group7
History
Group8
Detailed Dial
Group9
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the Group
in which the remote party you want to call is registered, then press the
ENTER button.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote
party you want to call.
4
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or press
the ENTER button to display the submenu, select “Connect” with the V, v,
B or b button, and press the ENTER button.
Phone Book
Home
Default Group
Room 101
ISDN 01-2345-6789
New Entry
Group Edit
Cancel
Connect
Edit
Copy
Delete
History
Detailed Dial
The system begins dialing the selected party. “Dialing” appears on the
monitor screen. When the system connects to the system on the remote site,
the message “Session Connected.” appears on the screen, and the picture
on the remote site is displayed.
Now you can start communication with the remote party.
To cancel dialing before connecting
While “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT
( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
To switch the display in the Phone Book between the list and the
thumbnails
Each time the F1 button on the Remote Commander is pressed, the display
changes between the list and the thumbnails.
104
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
To change the order of display
Each time the F2 button on the Remote Commander is pressed, the display
changes between the list of remote parties’ names in ascending alphabetical
order and that list in descending alphabetical order.
To display the Phone Book during communication
Press the
button on the Remote Commander during communication.
To call a remote party registered in the Private Phone Book
Insert the “Memory Stick” that contains the Private Phone Book into the
Memory Stick slot on the Communication System.
The Phone Book changes to the Private Phone Book.
2
Select “Private Phone Book” in the Home menu, and press the ENTER
button.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select a remote
party you want to call from the Private Phone Book.
4
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander. Or press
the ENTER button to display the submenu, select “Connect” with the V, v,
B or b button, and press the ENTER button.
Note
If the auto dialing feature of the Private Phone Book is activated, the system begins
dialing when the “Memory Stick” is inserted.
Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Detailed
Dial” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select
“Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER
button to display the Connect menu, then select “Enter Number/Address”.
The Detailed Dial menu appears on the screen.
Detailed Dial
Home
Dial to:
Line I/F
IP
Communication
Bit Rate
1024kbps
Number of Lines
1B (64K)
Phone Book
History
Cancel
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
105
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
1
2
Select the line interface to be used for connection.
Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Line I/F”, then press the ENTER
button. The setting items appear. Press the V, v, B or b button to select the
line interface to be used to connect to the remote party, then press the
ENTER button.
IP: Connects to a remote party via a LAN connected to the
(LAN)
connector.
ISDN: Connects to a remote party via an ISDN.
ISDN (2B): Connects to the H.221-format system via 2B channels of the
ISDN connection.
TEL: Connects to the phone of a remote party to conduct a voice meeting
via the ISDN connection.
Note
When a checkmark is put to “SIP” under “Line Interface” of the Line Interface setup
menu, you can select “SIP” from “Line I/F”.
3
Configure the LAN or ISDN line to be used for connection.
When using the LAN
1 Enter the IP address of a remote party to connect in the IP text box.
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the IP
text box, then press the ENTER button. Next, enter the IP address with
the number buttons on the Remote Commander or the on-screen
keyboard, and press the ENTER button.
Enter the host name and domain name (ex. host.domain) when using
the DNS server, or enter the party’s user name and user number
registered in the LAN setup menu on the remote party’s system when
using the gatekeeper, then press the ENTER button.
Notes
• When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4” in the Administrator setup menu,
you can enter a dot (.) with the b or DOT button.
• When “Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv6” or “IPv4/IPv6” in the
Administrator setup menu, you can enter a colon (:) with the b or DOT
button.
When “IPv4/IPv6” is specified, only colons can be entered with the b button.
When “IPv4/IPv6” is specified and you are calling using IPv4, press the DOT
button twice to enter a dot.
• To delete the last entered character, use the BACK SPACE button on the
Remote Commander or “Back Space” on the on-screen keyboard.
• To delete the entered IP address, use the RETURN button on the Remote
Commander or “Cancel” on the on-screen keyboard.
2 Select the communication bit rate.
Use the V, v, B or b button to select “Communication Bit Rate”, then
press the ENTER button. Press the V, v, B or b button to select the
communication bit rate from the displayed submenu, then press the
ENTER button.
106
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
When using the ISDN
1 Enter the telephone number of a remote party to connect in the A text
box.
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the A
text box, then press the ENTER button. Next, enter the telephone
number with the number buttons on the Remote Commander or onscreen keyboard, and press the ENTER button.
Notes
2 Select the number of ISDN lines to use during the call.
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Number of Lines”, then press the ENTER button. Press the V, v, B or
b button to select the number of channels to be used when calling a
remote party from the displayed items, then press the ENTER button.
Note
To connect to the remote party by entering all the telephone numbers for the
ISDN lines used
If the system of the remote party is not equipped with the bonding function, entering
one remote party’s telephone number does not allow automatic connection of
multiple ISDN lines used to connect to the remote party. To connect to the remote
party by entering all the telephone numbers, register the remote party’s telephone
numbers for the ISDN lines to be used referring to “Registering a Remote Party –
Phone Book”(page 112), then connect to the remote party according to the
procedure described in “Calling a Remote Party Registered in the Phone Book”
(page 103).
4
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander, or use the
V, v, B or b button to select “Connect” in the lower part of the menu, then
press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
The system begins dialing the IP address or ISDN telephone number
entered in step 3. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen.
When the system connects to the remote system, the message “Session
Connected.” appears on the screen, and the picture on the remote site is
displayed. Now you can start communication with the remote party.
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
107
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
• Do not enter the prefix number in the telephone number text box, when the prefix
setting is on. For details on prefix settings, see “Dial Setup Menu” on page 57.
• Even when you connect multiple ISDN lines (2B (128K) or more number of
lines), entering one telephone number of the remote party enables you to connect
all the lines used automatically.
• When you select ISDN (2B (128K)), the A1 and A2 text boxes appear. You can
enter a separate ISDN line number in each text box. Pressing the ENTER button
on the Remote Commander while the A2 text box is selected copies the number
entered in the A1 text box to the A2 text box.
• To delete the last entered character, use the BACK SPACE button on the Remote
Commander or “Back Space” on the on-screen keyboard.
• To delete the entered ISDN telephone number, use the RETURN button on the
Remote Commander or “Cancel” on the on-screen keyboard.
To cancel dialing before connecting
While “Dialing” is displayed on the monitor screen, press the DISCONNECT
( ) button or the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
To save the entered IP address or ISDN telephone number in the
Phone Book
When you enter the IP address or ISDN telephone number, the Save button
appears at the lower part of the menu.
Select “Save” with the V, v, B or b button, then press the ENTER button on
the Remote Commander. The List Edit menu is displayed. Save the address or
number you entered into the Phone Book.
For details on the List Edit menu, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone
Book” on page 112.
Redial function
Once you have input the IP address or ISDN telephone number using the
Detailed Dial menu, it will be entered in the text box of the Detailed Dial menu
the next time you open the menu.
Note
The redial function is not available:
• Once you have turned off the power of the system or set it to standby mode.
• When you cancel dialing the entered IP address or ISDN telephone number.
108
Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
Operations for answering a call differ depending on the setting of the answer
mode.
Note
The unit is set to manual answer mode under factory default settings.
Answering Calls (Manual/Auto Answer Mode)
Auto answer mode
The system automatically receives a call from a remote party and you can start
connecting. Although no operation is necessary to start, the picture on the local
site will be displayed on the remote site screen even if you are not ready to
begin.
Note
You cannot answer the call unless the power switch on the Communication System is
on.
For setting of the answer mode, see “Auto Answer” in the Answer setup menu
on page 58.
Answering a Call from a Remote Party
To receive a call in manual answer mode
When you receive a call, the Communication System rings and the message
“Incoming call. Answer?” appears on the monitor screen.
Press V, v, B or b to select “OK”, then press the ENTER button. The system
is then connected. Once the connection is made, the picture of the remote party
is displayed on the local monitor screen and the sound is heard. The picture and
sound on the local site will be enabled on the remote site at the same time.
The message “Session Connected.” appears on the monitor screen.
You are now ready to start a communication.
Note
See pages 123 to 131 to adjust the sound and picture during communication.
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
109
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Manual answer mode
When there is an incoming call, the Communication System rings. You need
to connect the call manually.
You can start connecting when you are ready.
When you do not want to answer the call
Press V, v, B or b to select “Cancel”, then press the ENTER button. Ringing
stops, and the connection is canceled.
To answer a call in auto answer mode
When you receive a call, the Communication System rings and the message
“Answering...” appears on the monitor screen. The system is automatically
connected and the picture of the remote party is displayed on the local monitor
screen and the sound is heard. The picture and sound on the local site will be
enabled on the remote site at the same time.
The message “Session Connected.” appears on the monitor screen.
You are now ready to start communication.
Picture on the local site
Picture on the remote site
Note
See pages 123 to 131 to adjust the sound and picture during communication.
When the system fails to make an ISDN connection
If the system fails to connect to the remote party, the message “Cannot
complete connection. (an ISDN cause code and a message are displayed here)”
appears on the monitor screen.
For details on ISDN cause codes and messages, see “On-Screen Messages”
on page 222.
110
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
Ending the Connection
1
Press the DISCONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander.
The message “Disconnect?” appears on the monitor screen.
2
Press the DISCONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander again,
or press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”,
then press the ENTER button.
The system is disconnected.
Note
The power of the Communication System remains on even if the system is
disconnected.
To register the connected remote party in the Phone Book
You can easily register the remote party who has just disconnected.
If you set “Last Number Registration” to “On” on the Device Setup page of the
General setup menu, the message “Register this participant in the list?”
appears after a communication with an unregistered remote party is finished.
When you select “OK”, the List Edit menu appears.
Note
If the “Last Number Registration” is set to “Off”, the message does not appear.
For “Last Number Registration” setting, see “General Setup Menu” on page
74.
Ending the Connection
111
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
To cancel disconnection of the system
Select “Cancel” with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander, then
press the ENTER button.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone
Book
You can register the telephone number or IP address of a remote party in the
Phone Book, allowing you to dial the party very easily.
Up to 1000 remote parties can be registered in the Phone Book. You can also
store a still image such as a participant’s portrait in the index list.
You can also create a Private Phone Book on a “Memory Stick” separately
from the Phone Book in the Communication System.
Registering a New Remote Party
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Phone
Book” in the Home menu, then press the ENTER button. Or select
“Connect” in the Home menu with the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER
button to display the Connect menu, then select “Select from Phone Book”.
The Phone Book opens.
IP:192.168.0.11
5/11/2008 13:00
Phone Book > Default Group
Home
Default Group
Find Name by First Initial
New Entry
Group Edit
Shared Phone Book
History
Detailed Dial
Note
The Phone Book can be displayed by selecting “Phone Book” in the History or
Detailed Dial menu.
2
112
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “New
Entry”, then press the ENTER button.
The List Edit menu appears.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
Phone Book
Index
Group Select
Dial to:
IP
More Options
3
None Specified
One-Touch Dial
Specified
None Specified
Line I/F
IP
Communication
Bit Rate
1024Kbps
Number of Lines
2B (128K)
Save
Cancel
Index
Enter the name of a remote party in the Index text box. You can use up to
39 letter and number characters.
Group Select
Select the group set in the Phone Book.
Dial to:
Enter the IP address or line number of a remote party depending on the line
interface you select.
When you select “IP” from “Line I/F”: Enter the remote party’s IP
address. Enter the host name and domain name (ex. host.domain) when
using the DNS server, or enter the party’s user name and user number
when using the gatekeeper (page 68).
When you select “ISDN” from “Line I/F”: Enter the remote party’s line
number. If you register the sub-address in the Phone Book, enter an
asterisk between the line number and sub-address. The sub-address can
only be composed of numbers.
When “More Options Enable” is set to “On” in the Dial setup menu
(page 57), six line input text boxes, A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 and C2, are
displayed. Be sure to enter the remote party’s number to the A1 text
box.
When you select “TEL” from “Line I/F”: Enter the telephone number of
a remote party. (ex. 0390123456)
When you select “SIP” from “Line I/F”: Enter the address of a remote
party or the number assigned by the SIP server.
The format of the address is the following:
• 4000 (number assigned by the SIP server)
• 4000@sip.com
• 192.168.1.1 (when the IP address and SIP server are not used)
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
113
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Set the items in the List Edit menu.
Use the V, v, B or b button and the ENTER button on the Remote
Commander to select the setup item.
To enter the characters, use the number buttons on the Remote Commander
or the displayed on-screen keyboard, and press the ENTER button. To
select the item, use the V, v, B or b button and press the ENTER button.
Icon/Image
Select the icon or a still image stored on a “Memory Stick” to be displayed
on the Phone Book.
Note
You cannot select a still image unless a “Memory Stick” in which still images are
stored is inserted.
One-Touch Dial Specified
Select whether to display the one-touch dial buttons in the Home menu.
Assign the F1, F2, F3 or F4 function button on the Remote Commander to
each one-touch dial button.
Line I/F
Select the line interface you are using to connect to a remote party. Select
from among IP, ISDN, TEL and SIP. Selecting any interface switches the
setting items in the List Edit menu.
Note
When a checkmark is put to “SIP” under “Line Interface” of the Line Interface setup
menu, you can select “SIP” from “Line I/F”.
Communication Bit Rate
Select the communication bit rate when you select “IP” or “SIP” with
“Line I/F”.
Number of Lines
Select the number of ISDN channels to be used when you select “ISDN”
with “Line I/F”.
Auto Dial
Set this item only for the Private Phone Book (page 119). Setting “Auto
Dial” to “On” allows you to automatically dial one of the lists in the Private
Phone Book simply by inserting the “Memory Stick” in which the Private
Phone Book is registered.
4
Use the V, v, B or b on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then
press the ENTER button.
The settings are registered in the Phone Book.
Note
When a connection with a remote party not registered in the Phone Book is terminated,
you can register this remote party to the Phone Book. In this case, the IP address or line
number is shown in “Index” as the name of the remote party. Modify it if necessary.
114
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
To connect to the remote party without using bonding
If the system of the remote party is not equipped with the bonding function,
entering one telephone number does not allow you to connect all the line
numbers used to connect to the remote party. To connect to the remote party
by entering all the ISDN line numbers used, you can set the connection without
using the bonding function of this system.
When you set “More Options Enable” to “On” in the Dial setup menu (page
57), the A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 and C2 text boxes appear in the List Edit menu.
Enter all the telephone numbers for the ISDN lines selected by “Number of
Lines”.
Note
When you set “Number of Lines” to “2B”, you can connect to the remote party by
selecting “ISDN (2B)” from “Line I/F” in the Detailed Dial menu.
When “More Options Enable” is set to “On” in the Dial setup menu, the More
Options button is shown at the lower part of the List Edit menu.
Select the More Options button with the V, v, B or b button on the Remote
Commander and press the ENTER button to open a menu for more detailed
dial settings. You can change the settings of the desired items.
Note
The contents set with the More Options button have priority over those set in the Dial
setup menu.
Editing the Contents of the Phone Book
You can edit the telephone number, IP address, name or setting registered in
the Phone Book.
1
Open the Phone Book.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote
party to be modified, then press the ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Cancel
Connect
Edit
Copy
Delete
3
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Edit”,
then press the ENTER button.
The List Edit menu appears.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
115
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
To set up more detailed options
4
Modify the telephone number, IP address, name or setting.
5
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The modification is completed.
Copying a Registered Party in the Phone Book
1
Open the Phone Book.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote
party to be copied, then press the ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
3
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Copy”,
then press the ENTER button.
The items for the selected party are copied, and the name is followed by “–
2”. You can use the setting after modifying the necessary items.
Deleting the Registered Remote Party
1
Open the Phone Book.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote
party to be deleted from the Phone Book, then press the ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
3
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Delete”, then press the ENTER button.
The message “Delete Entry?” appears.
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”,
then press the ENTER button.
The selected party is deleted.
To cancel deleting
Select “Cancel” in step 4, then press the ENTER button.
Creating a Group in the Phone Book (Group Edit)
You can create groups into which the registered remote parties are grouped.
To register a new group
1
116
Open the Phone Book.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Group
Edit”, then press the ENTER button.
The Phone Book > Group Edit menu appears.
Phone Book > Group Edit
New Entry
Previous
3
Phone Book > Group Edit
New Entry
Previous
Group Edit
Cancel
4
Enter the group name using the number buttons on the Remote
Commander and the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER buttons.
You can use the alphabetical letters, numbers and symbols.
5
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The registered group button is displayed.
Phone Book > Group Edit
New Entry
TOKYO
TOKYO
Previous
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
117
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “New
Entry”, then press the ENTER button.
The group name input menu appears.
6
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Previous”, then press the ENTER button.
The Phone Book is restored.
To modify the group name
1
Open the Phone Book > Group Edit menu, select the group button you
want to modify using the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander,
and press the ENTER button.
The submenu appears.
Phone Book > Group Edit
New Entry
TOKYO
Previous
Cancel
Edit
Delete
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Edit”,
then press the ENTER button.
The group name input menu appears.
3
Modify the group name using the number buttons on the Remote
Commander and the on-screen keyboard, then press the ENTER buttons.
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The modified group button is displayed in the Phone Book > Group Edit
menu.
Notes
• You can operate the following with a submenu in the Group Edit menu.
“Cancel”: Cancels selection of the group button.
“Delete”: Deletes a group in which no party is registered.
• You cannot delete a group button for which any remote parties are registered.
118
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
Creating a Private Phone Book
You can create your own Phone Book (Private Phone Book) on a “Memory
Stick”. Once the Private Phone Book is registered, inserting the “Memory
Stick” into the Communication System changes the Phone Book to the Private
Phone Book. You can also activate the Auto Dial feature, allowing you to
automatically start dialing one of the remote parties registered in the Private
Phone Book simply by inserting the “Memory Stick”.
To register a new remote party in a Private Phone Book
Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you want to register a remote party into
the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System.
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the direction of the arrow with the mark
facing upward.
2
Open the Phone Book page in the Administrator setup menu.
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
1
Setup
Administrator
Administrator8
Phone Book
Save Phone Book
Execute
Load Phone Book
Execute
Clear Phone Book
Execute
Auto Dialing
On
Create Private Phone Book Execute
Delete Private Phone Book Execute
Copy to Private Phone Book Execute
Cancel
For how to open the menu, see “Registering Local Information” on page
54.
3
Select “Create Private Phone Book”.
An empty folder and file for a Private Phone Book are created in the
“Memory Stick”.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
119
4
Register a new remote party.
The procedure is the same as that for registering in the Phone Book.
Proceed with steps 2 to 4 in “Registering a New Remote Party” on page
112.
The procedures for how to edit the contents of the Private Phone Book,
how to delete the registered remote party, or how to copy one of the
registered parties in the Private Phone Book are the same as those for the
Phone Book. Open the Private Phone Book and proceed with the steps
described on pages 115 to 116.
To copy all the contents of the Phone Book to the Private Phone Book
Insert the “Memory Stick” in which you want to store the Private Phone Book
into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System, then select “Copy
to Private Phone Book” in the Administrator setup menu. All the data
registered in the Phone Book are copied to the inserted “Memory Stick”.
To delete the Private Phone Book from the “Memory Stick”
Insert the “Memory Stick” from which you want to delete the registered
Private Phone Book into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication
System, then select “Delete Private Phone Book” on the Phone Book page in
the Administrator setup menu. All the data are deleted from the inserted
“Memory Stick”.
To dial a specified remote party in a Private Phone Book automatically
If you set “Auto Dialing” in the Administrator setup menu to “On”, you can
automatically dial one of the registered remote parties in the Private Phone
Book simply by inserting the “Memory Stick” in which the Private Phone
Book is registered.
120
1
Open the Private Phone Book.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the remote
party to dial automatically, then press the ENTER button.
3
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Edit”,
then press the ENTER button.
The List Edit menu appears.
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Auto
Dialing”, then press the ENTER button.
The setting is registered and “AUTO” appears in the Private Phone Book.
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
Using the Shared Phone Book
Using the Shared Phone Book function enables multiple Sony Visual
Communication Systems to access to a Phone Book located on a server.
For detailed configuration, consult your network administrator.
Notes
• You can dial a remote party registered in the Shared Phone Book in the same manner
as with the Phone Book. However, you cannot dial a remote party registered in a
multipoint connection list.
• You cannot register a new party, delete a registered party, attach an image, or edit the
Shared Phone Book. In addition, you cannot copy the remote parties registered in the
Shared Phone Book to the Private Phone Book.
In this system configuration, sharing of a Phone Book using H.350 is enabled.
H.350/LDAP
Shared Phone
Book server
Directory server
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
121
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
System configuration example
Using the Shared Phone Book
Check that “SPB Mode” is set to “On” in the Shared Phone Book setup menu,
and enter appropriate values for “SPB Server Address” and “SPB Server
Password”.
Setup
Shared Phone Book
Shared Phone Book
On
SPB Mode
SPB Server Address
SPB Server Password
Save
Cancel
When “SPB Mode” is set to “On”, the Shared Phone Book menu button
appears on the screen.
To display the Shared Phone Book
Select “Shared Phone Book” in the Phone Book, and press the ENTER button.
The display switches to the Shared Phone Book.
Phone Book
Home
Default Group
Room 101
Room 102
ISDN 01-2345-6789
IP 255.255.255.255
New Entry
Group Edit
Phone Book
History
Detailed Dial
To restore the Phone Book, select “Phone Book” in the menu, and press the
ENTER button.
The procedure for dialing the registered remote party in the Shared Phone
Book is the same as that for the Phone Book.
For details on dialing, see see “Calling a Remote Party Registered in the
Phone Book” on page 103.
122
Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book
Adjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Volume of the Received Sound
You can adjust the volume of the sound to be received from a remote party.
Press the VOLUME + button on the Remote Commander to increase the
volume, VOLUME – button to decrease it. The volume level indicator appears
on the monitor screen. The indicator will automatically disappear if you do not
operate the buttons for a certain time.
11
Turning Off the Sound Momentarily – Muting Function
You can momentarily turn off the sound to be sent to the remote party during
communication.
Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.
NEAR
The sound of the local party is not heard by the remote party. The
indicator appears on the monitor screen of the local site.
The
indicator appears on the monitor screen of the remote site,
indicating that the sound of the local party is not transmitted.
To restore the sound
Press the MIC ON/OFF button again.
The NEAR indicator on the local site and the
indicator on the remote
site disappear and the sound is heard by the remote party.
Adjusting the Sound
123
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Note
If feedback or distortion caused by increasing the volume occurs, decrease the volume.
Turning Off the Sound on Answering – Mic on Answer Function
You can turn off the sound to be sent to a remote party when you have
answered a call from the remote party.
If you set “Mic on Answer” to “Off” in the Answer setup menu, only the
picture on the local party will be sent to the remote party when answering a
NEAR indicator appears on the monitor screen.
call. The
For the setting, see “Mic on Answer” in the Answer setup menu on page 58.
To send the sound to the remote party
Press the MIC ON/OFF button on the Remote Commander.
NEAR indicator disappears and the sound is heard by the remote party.
The
Synchronizing Audio and Video – Lip Sync Function
During the communication a time lag may occur between the sound and
picture to be sent to the remote party, which prevents smooth communication.
Using the Lip Sync function adjusts to synchronize audio and video. However,
this may delay transmission of audio synchronized with video.
The Lip Sync function is enabled if you set “Lip Sync” to “Auto” on the Basic
Setup1 page in the Audio setup menu.
For the setting, see “Lip Sync”in the Audio setup menu on page 63.
Note
To enable the Lip Sync function of the remote party, you have to ask them to do so.
Reducing Echo – Echo Canceller
The Communication System is equipped with the echo canceller function,
allowing the echo that occurs during audio transmission to be reduced.
Setting “Echo Canceller” to “On” on the Basic Setup1 page in the Audio setup
menu activates the built-in echo canceller.
124
Adjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Camera
You can adjust the image shot by the local camera that is sent to the remote
party to obtain the desired angle and size.
During communication you can also control the camera on the remote site to
adjust the image shot by the remote camera.
Adjusting the Camera Zoom
Determine the size of the picture to be displayed on the monitor screen by
adjusting the zoom.
1
5/11/2008 13:00
Camera
Previous
Adjustments
Brightness
Preset
Details
2
Select the camera to be adjusted.
During communication pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander
switches between the camera on the local site and that on the remote site.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Adjustments”, then press the ENTER button.
The Adjustments menu appears.
Adjusting the Camera
125
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v,
B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER
button.
The Camera menu appears.
Adjustments
Local Camera :
T
W
Zoom indicator
4
Use the ZOOM button on the Remote Commander to zoom in or out.
Press the T (Telephoto) button to zoom in and the W (Wide angle) button
to zoom out.
To control the remote camera
• To control the remote camera, set “Far End Camera Control” (page 61) to
“On” in the Communication setup menu for both the local and remote sites.
If this setting is not configured properly, you will not be able to control the
remote camera.
• You cannot control the remote camera during a session if the remote control
format of the remote camera is not H.281. If you cannot control the remote
camera, ask the remote party about the remote control format of his camera.
• If the local and remote parties try to control the same camera at the same
time, the camera may not operate correctly.
Adjusting the Brightness
To adjust the brightness manually
1
Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v,
B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER
button.
The Camera menu appears.
5/11/2008 13:00
Camera
Previous
Adjustments
Brightness
Preset
Details
126
Adjusting the Camera
2
Select the camera to be adjusted.
During communication pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander
switches between the camera on the local site and that on the remote site.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Brightness”, then press the ENTER button.
The Brightness adjustment menu appears.
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
brightness adjustment bar, then press the ENTER button.
5/11/2008 13:00
Manual Adjustment
Previous
Brightness adjustment bar
5
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to adjust the
brightness of the screen.
Pressing the b button increases the brightness, and pressing the B button
decreases it.
Using the Preset Function
The settings for local or remote camera zoom can be registered in the preset
memory. Once you have stored the settings, you can easily recall them to move
the camera.
Up to 100 settings can be registered for the local camera and up to 6 settings
for the remote camera.
To register the preset setting
1
Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v,
B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER
button.
The Camera menu appears.
Adjusting the Camera
127
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Adjustments > Brightness
5/11/2008 13:00
Camera
Previous
Adjustments
Brightness
Preset
Details
2
Select the camera whose zoom setting you want to preset.
During communication pressing the F1 button on the Remote Commander
switches between the camera on the local site and that on the remote site.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset”,
then press the ENTER button.
The Preset Setting List appears.
Adjustments > Preset Setting List
Local Camera : First Camera
New Entry
Back to Home
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Use the V, v, B or b on the Remote Commander to select “New Entry”,
then press the ENTER button.
The Preset Save menu appears.
Adjustments > Preset Save
Preset Number
1
Camera Angle
Adjustments
Thumbnails
Register in Thumbnail/List
Save
5
128
Cancel
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset
Number”, then select the number to which the setting is stored.
Only the numbers that have not been used for presetting are selectable.
Adjusting the Camera
6
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Adjustments” under “Camera Angle”, then press the ENTER button, if
you want to adjust the camera zoom.
The Adjustments menu is displayed and you can adjust the zoom.
For the adjustment procedures, see “Adjusting the Camera Zoom” on
page 125.
After the adjustment is finished, press the RETURN button or the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
The Preset Save menu is restored.
8
When you want to register a thumbnail, use the V, v, B or b button on the
Remote Commander to select “Thumbnails” and press the ENTER button
to check the checkmark for “Register in Thumbnail/List”.
9
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The angle and zoom settings are stored in the selected number, and the
preset number is listed in the Preset Setting List.
To move the camera to the preset position
1
Press the CAMERA button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v,
B or b button to select “Camera” in the Home menu and press the ENTER
button.
The Camera menu appears.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Preset”
in the Camera menu, then press the ENTER button.
The Preset Setting List appears.
Adjustments > Preset Setting List
Local Camera : First Camera
New Entry
Back to Home
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the preset
number you want to recall, then press the ENTER button.
You can also recall the preset numbers 1 to 6 by pressing the number
buttons 1 to 6 on the Remote Commander.
The submenu appears.
Adjusting the Camera
129
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
7
4
Press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Load”,
then press the ENTER button.
The camera moves to the selected preset position.
Note
You can select the items below from the submenu:
“Cancel”: Cancels selection of the preset position.
“Edit”: Changes the selected preset position.
“Delete”: Deletes the selected preset position.
Adjusting the Camera in the Detailed Setup Menu
When you select “Details” in the Camera menu, the more detailed setup menu
opens. You can adjust various items for camera adjustment.
Backlight
On
White Balance
Auto
Focus
Auto
Focus Adjustment
OK
To use backlight compensation function
When the subject is shot with a bright background, set “Backlight” to “On”.
The backlight compensation is activated and you can obtain a bright picture.
To adjust the white balance
Set the white balance depending on the shooting location.
Auto: Adjusts the white balance automatically.
Indoor: Select when shooting the subject indoors.
Outdoor: Select when shooting the subject outdoors.
ONE PUSH: Select when adjusting the white balance by shooting a white
object in the center of the screen.
To adjust the focus automatically
Select “Auto” in the Focus drop-down list and press the ENTER button. The
focus is automatically adjusted.
Note
Depending on your operating environment, the focus may not be fixed.
130
Adjusting the Camera
To adjust the focus manually
1
Select “Manual” in the Focus drop-down list.
2
Select “Focus Adjustment” and press the ENTER button.
3
Adjust the focus using the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander.
To focus on a distant subject, press the b button.
To focus on a near subject, press the B button.
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Adjusting the Camera
131
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound
You can switch the picture displayed on the monitor screen, and switch
between the input picture and audio.
Switching the Displayed Picture between the Local and Remote
Pictures
When the displayed picture on the monitor can be switched during
communication, pressing the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander
displays the indication “F1: Switches the monitored picture between the
remote and local sites.” at the bottom of the monitor.
Each press of the F1 button on the Remote Commander switches the displayed
picture between those on the local and remote sites.
Selecting the Input Picture
1
Press the VIDEO INPUT button on the Remote Commander.
The Video Input > Near menu appears.
Video Input > Near
CAMERA
RGB
Save
2
Cancel
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the video
input on the local site, then press the ENTER button.
The picture input from the selected equipment is displayed on the monitor
screen.
CAMERA: Selects the camera picture from the built-in camera.
RGB: Selects the picture from the equipment connected to the RGB IN
connector.
3
132
To store the selected input in the memory of the system, use the V, v, B or
b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”, then press the
ENTER button.
The Video Input menu disappears.
The stored video input is not deleted even after the system is turned off, and
is selected when the power is turned on again.
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound
To change the video input name displayed in the Video Input menu
You can label the desired name for each video input on the Custom Input Label
page in the Video setup menu. When you switch the video input in step 2
above, the name you set is displayed in the Video Input menu.
For example, you can label: Camera, None, etc.
For details, see“Custom Input Label” in the Video setup menu on page 65.
Selecting the Video Input Using the F1 to F4 (Function) Buttons on
the Remote Commander
If you assign the video input (Camera or RGB) to any of the F1 to F4 buttons
on the Remote Commander in “Function Keys in Communication” of the
General setup menu, you can quickly switch the video input only by pressing
one of the F1 to F4 buttons.
Switching the Sound to Be Sent to the Remote Party
You can switch the sound sent to the remote party between the sound from the
microphone and that from the connected equipment. Use “Audio Input” in the
Audio setup menu.
For details, see “Audio Input” in the Audio setup menu on page 62.
Switching Video and Audio at the Same Time
Set “Link to Audio Input” to “On” on the Link to Mic page of the Video setup
menu. When you switch the video input, the audio input automatically
switches to the one which has been set to link to the switched video input.
For details, see“Link to Audio Input” in the Video setup menu on page 65.
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound
133
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
For details, see “Function Keys in Communication” in the General setup
menu on page 75.
Switching the Picture from the Remote System
You can switch the picture output from the remote system during
communication.
Press the VIDEO INPUT button, then F1 button on the Remote Commander.
The Video Input > Far menu appears.
Video Input > Far
CAMERA
S VIDEO
Sub Camera
Document Camera
RGB
YPbPr
Sub Document Camera
Save
Cancel
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the picture
output from the equipment connected to the remote system, then press the
ENTER button. The selected picture is input to the local system and is
displayed on the monitor screen.
Note
You can only select the picture that can be output from the remote system.
134
Selecting the Input Picture and Sound
Switching the Picture Displayed on the
Monitor Screen
You can display the pictures on the local and remote sites on the monitor
screen at the same time. This enables you to check how your own party is
monitored on the remote site.
1
Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander.
The Layout menu appears.
Layout
Screen Display Patterns
PandP
Side by Side
PinP
PinP
PinP
PinP
PinP
Save
Cancel
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
Full
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select one of the
screen display patterns, then press the ENTER button.
You can select from among the following eight patterns:
Full: Displays the remote picture in full screen.
PandP: Displays the remote picture on the left of the screen in large size
and the local picture on the right in small size.
Side by Side: Displays the remote and local pictures side by side.
PinP: Displays the local window picture in the remote full picture.
You can select the location of the window picture from among five
patterns.
3
To store the selected screen display pattern in the memory of the system,
use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Save”,
then press the ENTER button.
The Layout menu disappears.
Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen
135
To swap the location of the remote and local pictures
When the displayed picture can be switched during communication, pressing
the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander displays the indication “F1:
Switches the monitored picture between the remote and local sites.” at the
bottom of the monitor.
Each press of the F1 button on the Remote Commander swaps the location of
both pictures.
To switch the display to the remote picture while receiving RGB pictures
When receiving an RGB computer picture from a remote party, pressing the
LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander displays the indication “F2:
Restores the previous monitor screen.” at the bottom of the monitor. Press the
F2 button on the Remote Commander to switch to the remote picture. To return
to the RGB picture, press the F2 button again.
Note
When you connect an external monitor and set “Monitor Output” to “Dual” in the Video
setup menu, you cannot switch to RGB picture by pressing the F2 button.
136
Switching the Picture Displayed on the Monitor Screen
Capturing the Screen
You can capture the image displayed on the screen by using “Screen Capture”
in the Tools menu and display the captured image on the Phone Book. The
captured image is stored in the “Memory Stick”.
To capture the local image
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you want to save the capturing image
into the Memory Stick slot on the Communication System.
2
Display the image you want to capture on the monitor screen.
3
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander, or press the V, v, B
or b button to select “Tools” in the Home menu and press the ENTER
button.
The Tools menu appears.
4
Press the b button on the Remote Commander, and select “Execute” for
“Screen Capture” with the V, v, B or b button then press the ENTER
button.
Tools
Home
Memory Stick
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
The image displayed on the monitor is captured and stored in the “Memory
Stick”.
For the procedure how to display the captured image on the Phone Book,
see “Registering a New Remote Party” on page 112.
To capture the remote image
1
Display the image of the remote site you want to capture on the monitor
screen during communication.
For details on adjusting the remote camera, see “Adjusting the Camera”
on page 125.
Capturing the Screen
137
Chapter 3: Basic Connection
For details on adjusting the camera, see “Adjusting the Camera” on page
125.
138
2
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to display the Tools
menu.
3
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Execute”
for “Screen Capture”, then press the ENTER button.
The remote picture is captured and is stored in the “Memory Stick”.
Capturing the Screen
Chapter 4:
Connection with
Optional
Equipment
This chapter describes the various connections using the optional equipment in
addition to the components contained in the PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System.
To make a multipoint connection, see Chapter 6.
Using a Tools Menu
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
Pressing the b button on the Remote Commander, selecting each item with the
V, v, B or b button and pressing the ENTER button enable the following
operations:
Presentation
Pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to transmit
an RGB picture input from a connected computer to a remote party. During
transmission, the message “Executing” appears and the selectable item
changes to “Stop”. To stop transmitting the RGB picture, select “Stop” and
press the ENTER button.
Using a Tools Menu
139
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Pressing the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander opens the Tools menu
on the monitor screen.
The Tools menu allows you to perform operations often used simply by
selecting the item in the menu.
For details on presentation, see “Using the Computer Picture for
Presentation” on page 141.
Streaming
Pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to
broadcast live stream of the visual communication, and people who do not
participate in the communication can watch it over the Web. During
broadcasting, the message “Executing” appears and the selectable menu item
changes “Stop”. To stop broadcasting a live stream, select “Stop” and press the
ENTER button.
For details, see “Streaming a Communication” on page 144.
Recording
Pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to save the
video and audio of the visual communication in progress in a “Memory Stick”.
While the recording is being saved, the message “Executing” appears and the
selectable menu item changes to “Stop”. Selecting “Stop” and pressing the
ENTER button stops recording.
For details on recording, see “Recording a Visual Communication” on page
146.
Annotation
Pressing the ENTER button displays the Annotation Start menu. You can
transmit the picture with letters and graphics overwritten with a commercially
available pen tablet or display a pointer on the screen (Annotation function).
While the annotation function is being executed, the message “Executing”
appears and the selectable menu item changes to “Stop”. Selecting “Stop” and
pressing the ENTER button ends annotation.
For details on annotation, see “Using the Annotation Function” on page 148.
Icon Display
Pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander and selecting “On”
with the V, v, B or b button display the indicators on the screen. Selecting
“Off” hides the indicators.
Reject Answer
Pressing the ENTER button and selecting “On” with the V, v, B or b button
enables you to reject incoming calls from other terminals during
communication. Selecting “Off” results in accepting the incoming calls.
Screen Capture
Pressing the ENTER button on the Remote Commander allows you to save the
picture displayed on the screen in a “Memory Stick” as a still image.
For details on screen capture, see “Capturing the Screen” on page 137.
140
Using a Tools Menu
Using the Computer Picture for
Presentation
You can transmit an RGB picture input from a computer, etc. with the local
picture simultaneously to a remote party.
Note
The acceptable RGB signals differ depending on whether they are transmitted during
presentation mode or computer display mode.
For details on acceptable RGB signals, see “PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System (RGB IN)” on page 231.
Connecting a Computer
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
L R
REC
OUT
to RGB IN
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
Connecting cable with the
D-sub 15-pin connectors
(not supplied)
to RGB OUT
Computer
Using the Computer Picture for Presentation
141
Making a Presentation
To configure the presentation mode
When you transmit an RGB picture from a computer, etc. and a camera picture
simultaneously to a remote party, the remote party can view both pictures
simultaneously. This function is called “to make a presentation using the
presentation mode complying with H.239”. Using this function allows smooth
reproduction of both camera and computer pictures. To make a presentation
using the presentation mode complying with H.239, it is necessary to turn on
the presentation mode on both the local and remote systems. If the presentation
mode on either of the systems is turned off, a presentation complying with
H.239 cannot be made.
To configure the presentation mode, set “H.239” to “On” on the IP: Mode page
(page 59) or on the ISDN: Mode page (page 61) of the Communication setup
menu.
To start a presentation
1
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools
menu.
2
Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b
button to select “Execute” for “Presentation”.
The RGB picture from the computer is transmitted to the remote party.
While presentation is being executed, the message “Executing” appears on
the screen.
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Executing]
Stop
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
Note
You can also transmit the computer picture to the remote party by pressing the
PRESENTATION button on the Remote Commander instead of performing steps
1 and 2 above.
142
Using the Computer Picture for Presentation
To change the display pattern of the presentation when the H.239 function
is disabled
Select the display pattern for the presentation with “Presentation Screen” on
the Basic Setup page of the Video setup menu (page 65) before starting a
presentation.
Full Screen: The computer picture to be transmitted from the local system is
displayed in full screen.
PandP: The computer picture to be transmitted from the local system and the
selected input picture (local camera picture, etc.) are displayed in PandP
mode.
Side by Side: The computer picture to be transmitted from the local system
and the selected input picture (local camera picture, etc.) are displayed in
Side by Side mode.
Note
If the remote system does not support H.239, you cannot transmit the input picture
(camera picture, etc.) and the computer picture as two streams, even if “H.239” is set
to “On” on your system.
To stop the presentation
Using the Computer Picture for Presentation
143
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Select “Stop” for “Presentation” in the Tools menu and press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander. Transmission of the computer picture
stops.
You can also stop the presentation by pressing the PRESENTATION button
on the Remote Commander.
Streaming a Communication
By broadcasting a stream of a visual communication, people who cannot
attend the communication can watch the proceedings over the Web using a
computer.
Before broadcasting a live stream, be sure to configure the live stream
permission setting.
For details on viewing a streamed communication, see “Chapter 8: Web
Control Function”.
For details on the streaming settings, see “Streaming” on the Streaming/
Recording page of the Administrator setup menu on page 80.
Starting a streaming broadcast
1
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools
menu.
2
Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b
button to select “Execute” for “Streaming”, then press the ENTER button.
The streaming broadcast starts, and the communication in progress can be
watched from a computer over the Web.
While the streaming broadcast is running, the message “Streaming
[Executing]” is displayed in the Tools menu and the menu item changes to
“Stop”.
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Executing]
Stop
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
Notes
• If you start streaming before a communication begins, the broadcast will continue
streaming after the communication begins.
• Depending on Web access limitations, about 10 terminals can view a streaming
broadcast simultaneously. The actual number of terminals that can view the broadcast
simultaneously depends on your system’s operating environment.
144
Streaming a Communication
To stop a streaming broadcast
Selecting “Stop” for “Streaming” in the Tools menu and pressing the ENTER
button stop the streaming broadcast.
Notes
• Even if the Communication System is turned off while the streaming broadcast is
being executed, the streaming broadcast continues.
• The streaming broardcast cannot be executed during encrypted connection.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Streaming a Communication
145
Recording a Visual Communication
The video and audio of a visual communication can be saved in a “Memory
Stick” in MPEG4 format. The saved data can then be viewed on a computer.
For details on the recording settings, see “Recording” on the “Streaming/
Recording” page of the Administrator setup menu on page 80.
To start recording
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” into the Memory Stick slot.
2
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools
menu.
3
Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b
button to select “Execute” for “Recording”, then press the ENTER button.
The message “Start recording?” appears.
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”,
then press the ENTER button.
Recording in the “Memory Stick” starts.
During recording, the message “Recording [Executing]” is displayed in the
Tools menu and the menu item changes to “Stop”.
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Executing]
Stop
Annotation
[Suspended]
Execute
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
146
Recording a Visual Communication
To stop recording
1
Select “Stop” for “Recording” in the Tools menu, then press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander.
The message “Stop recording?” appears.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “OK”,
then press the ENTER button.
Recording in the “Memory Stick” stops.
Notes
• If the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick” is no longer enough for storage
during recording, the recording stops automatically and a notification message
appears.
• Although the recorded MPEG4 files have the same file type name as the MPEG4
files that can be played on the PSP or other devices that support the “Memory
Stick” video format, you cannot play the files on these devices even after the files
are recognized and moved to the file directories of these devices.
• Recording cannot be executed during encrypted connection.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Recording a Visual Communication
147
Using the Annotation Function
During communication you can transmit or receive letters and graphics written
on the screen with a pen tablet as they are written. You can also point the
camera picture or computer picture with a pointer. This function is called
“Annotation”.
The annotation function supports the Bamboo small CTH-470/K0* pen tablet
from Wacom Co., Ltd.
* Wacom and the Wacom logo are registered trademarks of Wacom Co., Ltd.
Bamboo is a trademark.
For details on the Bamboo small CTH-470/K0, consult with a Sony dealer.
Note
The communication using a pen tablet is only available for communication between the
PCS-XG80/XG80S/XG55/XG55S/XA80/XA55/XL55/G60/G60D/G60DP
Communication Systems. A pen tablet cannot be used for communication with other
Sony communication systems.
Connecting a Pen Tablet
Turn off the Communication System.
2
Connect the pen tablet to the TABLET connector on the left side of the
Communication System.
2(L)
1(R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
TABLET
PRO
1
to TABLET
Pen tablet
3
148
Press the ?/1 (power) switch on the Communication System to turn it on.
Using the Annotation Function
Using the Annotation Function while in Communication
To start annotation
1
Start communication.
2
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools
menu.
3
Press the b button on the Remote Commander and press the V, v, B or b
button to select “Execute” for “Annotation”, then press the ENTER button.
Tools
Home
Presentation
[Suspended]
Execute
Streaming
[Suspended]
Execute
Recording
[Suspended]
Execute
Annotation
[Executing]
Stop
Icon display
On
Reject Answer
Off
Screen Capture
Execute
Machine Status
Setup
4
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Background Screen” for executing the annotation function and press the
ENTER button.
Background Screen
Local Picture
Remote Picture
Received Computer
Picture
Transmitting
Computer Picture
Annotation Mode
Drawing
Pointing
Start
Cancel
Remote Picture: Selects the picture on the remote site as the background
Local Picture: Selects the picture on the local site as the background
Received Computer Picture: Selects the computer picture received from
the remote site as the background
Transmitting Computer Picture: Selects the computer picture on the
local site as the background
Using the Annotation Function
149
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
The Annotation Start menu appears.
Notes
• “Received Computer Picture” can be selected only when the computer picture is
being received from the remote site.
• “Transmitting Computer Picture” can be selected only when the computer picture
is being transmitted from the local site.
5
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select
“Annotation Mode” and press the ENTER button.
Drawing: Allows you to write letters or graphics on the screen.
Pointing: Allows display of a pointer on the screen.
6
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Start”
and press the ENTER button.
The
indicator indicating that the local party uses annotation
appears.
When the Drawing mode is selected,
(pen) indicator appears on the
monitor screen and
(pointer) appears when the Pointing mode is
selected.
7
Write letters or graphics on the screen using a pen supplied with the pen
tablet or your finger, or move the pointer on the screen.
The written data is displayed on the screen in live.
Monitor screen
For details on how to use the pen tablet, refer to the instruction manual
supplied with the pen tablet.
150
Using the Annotation Function
Operations during pointing
You can point to any desired portion on the monitor screen with a pointer. You
cannot write letters and graphics in pointing mode.
Operations during drawing
Operate using the function keys on the tablet and the buttons on the pen.
Eraser
Start
Stop
Select Line Density
Drawing Rights
Select Color
Erase All
To stop drawing
Press the second key from the top on the tablet.
To change the color
Press the lower pen button. Each press changes the color. You can select from
among black, red, blue, green, yellow, orange, purple and white.
To perform this using touch operations, place one finger on the tablet screen,
and tap to the right of that position with a second finger.
To change the line density
Press the upper pen button. Each press changes the line density. You can select
from three different line densities.
To perform this using touch operations, place one finger on the tablet screen,
and tap to the left of that position with a second finger.
To erase with the eraser
Touch the tail switch (eraser) of the pen onto the tablet and move it on the
letters or graphics you want to erase.
To perform this using touch operations, touch the tablet screen with two
fingers, and perform the operation using the balls of your fingers.
To erase all written letters and graphics
Press the bottommost key on the tablet.
Using the Annotation Function
151
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
To start drawing
Press the topmost key on the tablet.
To obtain the drawing rights
Normally, the drawing rights belong to the party who starts annotation. In the
case that the remote party starts annotation, the Obtain Drawing Rights button
appears and the
indicator (Drawing executed by the remote party) on
the monitor screen on the local site.
If you want to obtain the drawing rights, press the second key from the bottom
on the tablet. The
indicator (Drawing executed by the local party)
appears on the monitor screen, and you are allowed to write letters and
graphics on the screen.
To save the drawings written using annotation
1
Insert a “Memory Stick” in which you want to save the drawings using
annotation into the Communication System.
2
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools
menu.
3
Select “Execute” for “Screen Capture” in the Tools menu.
The drawing using annotation on the screen is saved in the “Memory
Stick” as a still image.
To end the annotation mode
152
1
Press the TOOLS button on the Remote Commander to open the Tools
menu.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select “Stop”
for “Annotation”, then press the ENTER button.
The annotation mode ends.
The letters and graphics written using the annotation function are deleted
when the communication ends.
Using the Annotation Function
Using External Microphones and
Headphones
The built-in microphone is intended for personal use. The PCS-A1 (not
supplied) and PCSA-A3 (not supplied) microphones can also be connected.
You can input the stereo sound from two PCS-A1 (not supplied) or PCSA-A3
(not supplied) microphones to the system.
You can also connect headphones or headsets to the system.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Using External Microphones and Headphones
153
To connect the microphones and headphones
2(L)
1(R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
2(L)
1(R)
MIC (A1/A3)
2 (L)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
PCS-A1 (not supplied) or
PCSA-A3 microphone (not supplied)
TABLET
PRO
Connect the optional microphones to the MIC (A1/A3) 1 (R) and 2 (L) jacks
and the headphones to the (headphone) jack on the Communication System.
Power is supplied to the microphones from the system.
MIC (A1/A3)
1 (R)
MIC (R)
2(L)
1(R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
2(L)
1(R)
(headphone)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
TABLET
PRO
MIC (L)
Headset
(commercially available)
154
(headphone)
Using External Microphones and Headphones
2(L)
1(R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
2(L)
1(R)
to MIC (A1/A3)
1 (R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
TABLET
PRO
Headphones
(commercially available)
To use the connected microphones
Set “Audio Input” to “MIC” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio setup
menu, and set “Input Select (MIC)” to “MIC (A1/A3)” (page 62).
To input the stereo sound from two microphones, set “Input Mode” to “Stereo”
(page 63). Set it to “Monaural” to input monaural sound from two
microphones.
Notes on installation of the microphones
• Install microphone about 50 cm (1.6 ft) away from the participants.
• Place the microphone in a quiet, echo-free location.
• Install microphones away from equipment that may cause noise.
• Avoid covering the microphones, with paper for example, or carrying the
microphones and moving them. If you do either, extreme noise and echo may
be heard temporarily by the remote party. In this case, wait until the echo
disappears.
• When stereo sound is input, locate the microphone connected to the MIC
(A1/A3) 1 (R) jack on the right of the camera and the microphone connected
to the MIC (A1/A3) 2 (L) jack on the left.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Using External Microphones and Headphones
155
Microphone layout examples
PCS-A1 microphones
PCS-A1
PCS-XL55
PCSA-A3 microphones
PCSA-A3
PCS-XL55
156
Using External Microphones and Headphones
Recording during a Communication
You can record the voices of participants on both the remote and local sites
during a communication if you connect an audio recorder to the REC OUT
jack on the Communication System.
This is convenient for taking minutes of the communication.
To connect an audio recorder
to REC OUT L/R
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
Audio recording device
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
Audio cable (not supplied)
When recording with an audio recorder
When an audio recorder is connected to both the AUDIO IN and REC OUT
jacks, set “Recording Mute” to “On” on the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio
setup menu, since the echo may cause and is transmitted to a remote party
(page 62).
To record the sound output from the REC OUT L/R jacks in 2-channel
monaural, set “REC OUT Mode” to “Monaural 2ch” on the Basic Setup2 page
of the Audio setup menu.
Recording during a Communication
157
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
19.5V
AUX CONTROL
!
to audio
inputs
Sending Audio/Video from the External
Equipment to a Remote Party
The Communication System allows you to send the picture and sound output
from a connected computer, for example, to a remote party.
To connect the video equipment for input
The Communication System can be connected to RGB video equipment.
to AUDIO IN
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
to RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
Audio cable
(not supplied)
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
Connecting cable with the
D-sub 15-pin connectors
(not supplied)
to audio output
to RGB OUT
Computer
To input audio/video from external equipment
To input video
Press the VIDEO INPUT button on the Remote Commander to open the Video
Input >Near menu, then select the video you want to input.
Video Input > Near
CAMERA
RGB
Save
Cancel
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the external
equipment connected to each video input on the Communication System, then
press the ENTER button.
The picture from the selected equipment is displayed.
158
Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party
CAMERA: Video from the built-in camera.
RGB: Video of a computer, etc. connected to the RGB IN connector.
To save the selected input, press the V, v, B or b button on the Remote
Commander to select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.
To input audio
Set “Audio Input” to “AUX” or “MIC+AUX” on the Basic Setup1 page of the
Audio setup menu (page 62).
When set to “AUX”, the sound from the external equipment is input and the
sound from a microphone is deactivated. When set to “MIC+AUX”, both
sounds are input.
To switch to the sound from the external equipment connected to the AUDIO
IN jack, set “Input Select (AUX)” to “AUDIO” on the Basic Setup1 page of
the Audio setup menu (page 63).
To switch the input video and audio at the same time
Set “Link to Audio Input” to “On” on the Link to Mic page of the Video setup
menu (page 65) so as to link the audio you want to switch at the same time with
the video input.
When the video input is switched, the audio input is simultaneously switched
to the one linked to the video input.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Sending Audio/Video from the External Equipment to a Remote Party
159
Viewing the Picture from the System on
a Monitor or Projector
When the monitor or projector is connected to the Communication System,
you can view the picture from the system.
To connect a monitor or projector
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
to RGB
OUT
RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
Monitor,
projector, etc.
Connecting cable with D-sub 15-pin
connectors
to RGB IN
To use the connected display equipment
When outputting the picture both to the monitor of the Communication System
and the display equipment connected to the RGB OUT connector, set “Monitor
Output” to “Dual” on the Basic Setup page of the Video setup menu (page 65).
For RGB output, you can select the video format of the signal output from the
RGB OUT connector with “RGB Monitor Output Format”. You can select
“SXGA”, “XGA” or “WXGA” (page 65).
160
Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector
Pictures displayed on the two monitors
During communication, the following images are displayed on the two
monitors.
Picture displayed on the monitor of the Communication System
The local or remote picture shot by the camera (moving picture) is monitored
on the monitor of the Communication System.
To switch between the local and remote pictures, press the LAYOUT button,
then F1 button on the Remote Commander.
Remote camera picture
Local camera picture
F1 button
Local camera picture
Picture displayed on an external monitor
The picture shot by the local camera or the RGB picture transmitted from the
remote party can be displayed on an external monitor connected to the RGB
OUT connector.
Viewing the Picture from the System on a Monitor or Projector
161
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Remote camera picture
Communicating without the Picture –
Voice Meeting
The Visual Communication System enables a voice only communication using
telephones via an ISDN line. (Voice Meeting)
Basic connecting procedures are the same as those for normal communication
with audio/video.
Note
If “Lens Cover Mic On/Off Function” is set to “On”, the microphone will turn off when
the lens cover is closed.
Conducting a voice meeting with a remote party not registered in the phone
book
Set “Line I/F” to “TEL” in the Detailed Dial menu.
During the Voice Meeting, the “Voice Only” indicator is displayed.
For “Line I/F” setting, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the
Phone Book” on page 105.
To register a remote party for a Voice Meeting
Set “Line I/F” to “TEL” in the List Edit menu displayed from the Phone Book.
For registration, see “Registering a Remote Party – Phone Book” on page
112.
To set the audio compression format
Select the audio compression format by setting “Telephone Mode” of the Dial
setup menu.
When you initiate the voice meeting, set “Telephone Mode” to “Auto” (page
57). When set to “Auto”, the G.711 µ-law format is automatically selected.
You need not set the audio compression format when receiving a call for a
Voice Meeting from the remote party.
162
Communicating without the Picture – Voice Meeting
Controlling the Remote System with the
Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission
The Visual Communication System enables you to control the remote system
connected by transmitting the tone signal (DTMF: Dual Tone Multi
Frequency) assigned to the numbers for dialing (0-9, , ).
1
Press the TONE ( ) button on the Remote Commander during
communication.
The DTMF menu appears on the monitor screen.
2
Press one of the number buttons (0-9, , ) on the Remote Commander
corresponding to the tone signal you want to transmit to the remote party.
The tone signal will be transmitted when the button is pressed.
3
To stop transmitting the tone signal, press the ENTER button on the
Remote Commander.
The DTMF menu disappears.
Chapter 4: Connection with Optional Equipment
Note
The microphone is automatically turned off while the DTMF menu is displayed.
Controlling the Remote System with the Tone Signal – DTMF Transmission
163
Accessing the Communication System
The following controls are available to access the Communication System. For
details on each control, consult your Sony dealer.
Note
Depending on the operating environment, unauthorized third parties on the network
may be able to access the system. When allowing external access, be sure to configure
all of the passwords on the Password page (page 77) of the Administrator setup menu.
Using a Web Browser
You can control or set up the Communication System by accessing it from a
Web browser.
To access the Communication System from a Web browser, set “Web
Monitor” to “On” and “Web Access” to “Enabled” on the Access Permit page
of the Administrator setup menu (page 80).
For details on Web operation, see “Chapter 8: Web Control Function”.
Using Telnet
You can control or set up the Communication System by accessing it with
Telnet.
To access the Communication System from Telnet, set “Telnet Access” to
“Enabled” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu (page
80).
Using SSH
You can control or set up the Communication System by accessing it with
SSH.
To access the Communication System from SSH, set “SSH Access” to
“Enabled” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator setup menu (page
81).
164
Accessing the Communication System
Chapter 5:
Encrypted
Connection
When a strictly confidential communication is required, the communication
system enables a connection with encrypted video and audio. A connection
conducted using this feature is known as an encrypted connection.
This chapter describes how to conduct an encrypted connection.
The Communication System is equipped with standard encryption, which
complies with the H.233, H.234 and H.235 standardized by the ITU-T.
Notes
• Streaming and recording are not available during an encrypted connection.
• The maximum bandwidth for encrypted connections is 6 Mbps.
Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection
165
Preparing for an Encrypted Connection
via LAN
To start an encrypted connection, “Encryption Mode” must be set in the
Encryption setup menu.
Set “Encryption Mode” to “Connect Priority” or “Encrypt Priority” in the
Encryption setup menu.
IP:192.168.0.11
Setup
5/11/2008 13:00
Encryption
Encryption
Connect Priority
Encryption Mode
Save
Cancel
Connect Priority
Connects with encryption to a remote party with standard encrypted connection
enabled. Connects without encryption to parties unable to connect with
standard encryption or parties with encryption set to off.
Connect with encryption
Local system:
Standard encrypted connection available
Remote system:
Standard encrypted connection available
Connect without encryption
Local system:
Standard encrypted connection available
166
Remote system:
Standard encrypted connection unavailable
Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN
Encrypt Priority
Connects only to remote parties with standard encrypted connection enabled.
Connect with encryption
Local system:
Standard encrypted connection available
Remote system:
Standard encrypted connection available
Do not connect
Local system:
Standard encrypted connection available
Remote system:
Standard encrypted connection unavailable
Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection
Preparing for an Encrypted Connection via LAN
167
Starting an Encrypted Connection
You can start an encrypted connection by calling a remote party in the same
manner as a daily connection.
During an encrypted connection, the encryption icon,
, is displayed.
H
Note
If there is no icon displayed, transmitted and received data are not encrypted. Confirm
if an icon is displayed before starting a connection.
When the encrypted connection is disabled
If the following message appears when you call a remote party, an encrypted
connection is not available.
168
Error Messages
Causes
The far-end system is not
compatible with the encryption
feature.
The remote system is not equipped with an
encryption feature.
The encryption feature on a farend system is disabled.
The encryption feature on a remote system is
turned off or the signal encryption method setting
on the remote system is different from that on the
local system.
The encryption feature on a farend system is enabled.
The encryption feature on a remote system is
turned on.
The conference could not start
because the encryption feature at
the near-end side was disabled.
“Encryption Mode” is set to “Off” on the local
system.
The conference could not start
because the encryption feature at
the far-end side was disabled.
The encryption feature on the remote system is
disabled.
The conference could not start
because the signal encryption
method at the near-end side
differed from that of the far-end
side.
The encryption method setting on the remote
system is not the same as that on the local
system.
Starting an Encrypted Connection
Error Messages
Causes
The standard encryption
videoconference with SIP
connection is not available.
You are connected to the remote system via SIP
connection.
Chapter 5: Encrypted Connection
Starting an Encrypted Connection
169
Chapter 6:
Multipoint
Connection
This chapter describes how to connect your system to multiple points.
When connecting via a LAN, multipoint connection among up to 3 points
including your site is available. When connecting via an ISDN, multipoint
connection among up to 3 points including your site is available.
A multipoint connection using LAN and ISDN mixed is also available.
Restrictions on the use of the MCU software
• When a multipoint connection is made via LAN, you can set up the total
communication bit rate for all the connecting points with “Total Bandwidth”
in the Communication setup menu. As the communication bit rate for each
point is automatically adjusted so as not to exceed the value selected in
“Total Bandwidth”, actual bit rate per point may differ from that selected for
that point.
• When a multipoint connection is made via an ISDN, the same number of
channels should be used on all the points and the total channels must not
exceed 12B.
• The H.264, H.263+ and H.261 video modes are supported. However, H.264
High Profile is not supported. In addition, connection in 1080 Mode is not
supported.
• The G.711, G.722, G.728 and MPEG4 AAC audio modes are supported.
• A multipoint connection including a SIP connection is not available.
• Cannot be used as the main terminal in a cascade connection.
170
Connection Examples of a Multipoint
Connection
Using the LAN Connection (Up to 3 Points)
• Multipoint connection for up to 3 points is available.
• If you have already made a point-to-point connection when a third point
calls, the system automatically starts multipoint connection.
to
(100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T)
to LAN
UTP cable (category 5, straight)
(not supplied)
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection
171
Using the ISDN Connection
Multipoint connection for up to 3 points is available by using the optional
PCSA-B384S or PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.
The illustration shows an example using the
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.
PCSA-B384S or
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit
to ISDN1 to 6
ISDN modular cables
(not supplied)
to ISDN lines
Notes on the number of ISDN lines used and number of remote
parties for a multipoint connection
You can select the number of ISDN channels to be used for the remote point
connected first using “ISDN Bandwidth” on the ISDN: Mode page of the
Communication setup menu (page 61).
However, if the number of remote points connected increases as a result of
dialing from the main terminal, some of the channels used for the first point
will be cut off and used for newly connected points instead. For example,
if you use six ISDN lines (up to 12B channels available), 12B channels will be
used for the first remote point only when no other points are connected. When
the system connects to a second point, the number of channels for the first
point decreases, and 6B channels will be used for both the first and second
points.
Even if one of the remote points in a multipoint connection is disconnected, the
number of channels used for the remaining points will not increase.
Note
When you are called from a remote party and the remote party has set up a lower number
of ISDN channels than that in your terminal, the setting on the remote party’s terminal
has priority.
172
Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection
To connect with a normal phone
When you are using an ISDN connection, a normal phone can be connected at
up to 3 points.
Only the 1B (64K) connection is available for a normal phone.
Using Both LAN and ISDN
Multipoint connection with terminals connected via a LAN and ISDN is
available.
The illustration shows an example
using the PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.
PCSA-B384S or
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit
to
(100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T)
to ISDN1 to 6
ISDN modular cables
(not supplied)
UTP cable (category 5,
straight) (not supplied)
to ISDN lines
to LAN
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Connection Examples of a Multipoint Connection
173
Configuring Multipoint
Setting Up Multipoint
1
Open the Multipoint setup menu, set “Multipoint Mode” to “AUTO”, and
make the necessary settings.
Setup
Multipoint
Multipoint
Multipoint Mode
AUTO
Broadcast Mode
Split
Split
Four-screen Mosaic
Save
Cancel
For details on “Broadcast Mode” and “Split”, see “Using the Display
Control” on page 183.
2
Open the Communication setup menu and make the necessary settings.
Setup
Communication
Communication1
IP
Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception Off
Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint Off
Save
Cancel
For details, see “Communication Setup Menu” on page 59.
Registering the Remote Parties in the Multipoint Connection List
You can register a multipoint connection list that includes all remote parties for
a multipoint connection in the Phone Book. It allows you to dial all the parties
simultaneously.
You can enter new remote parties to register in the multipoint connection list
or add the parties registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint connection
list.
174
Configuring Multipoint
To register a multipoint connection list in the Phone Book
The basic procedure for registration is the same as when registering a remote
party for a point-to-point connection. For details on the procedure, see
“Registering a New Remote Party” on page 112.
1
Select “New Entry” in the Phone Book to display the List Edit menu, then
enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.
Phone Book
Index
MULTI LIST
Group Select
Dial to:
None Specified
IP
One-Touch Dial Specified None Specified
Number of Connected Sites 1
IP
Line I/F
Communication Bit Rate 1024Kbps
Number of Lines
28(128K)
Save
2
Cancel
Select “Number of Connected Sites” and select the number of sites to
which you want to connect.
The “Dial to:” text boxes that correspond to the selected numbers of sites
are displayed.
Phone Book
Index
MULTI LIST
Group Select
None Specified
Dial to:
IP
One-Touch Dial Specified None Specified
Dial to:
IP
Number of Connected Sites 2
IP
Line I/F
Communication Bit Rate 1024Kbps
Number of Lines
Cancel
3
Select the line interface icon or a still image to be displayed in the Phone
Book.
You can select “ ” as an icon for a multipoint connection list.
4
Set up the line interface of the remote parties you want to register in a
multipoint connection list in the “Dial to:” text boxes.
Select the line interface from the drop-down list on the left, and enter the
number of a remote party in the text box.
For LAN connection: Select “IP” from the drop-down list, and enter the
IP address.
For ISDN connection: Select “ISDN” from the drop-down list, and enter
the line number.
For ISDN (Telephone) connection: Select “TEL” from the drop-down
list, and enter the telephone number. (ex. : 0390123456).
Configuring Multipoint
175
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Save
28(128K)
Enter all the parties to which you want to make a multipoint connection.
Phone Book
Index
MULTI LIST
Multipoint
Group Select
None Specified
Dial to:
IP
123.123.123.1
One-Touch Dial Specified None Specified
Dial to:
IP
123.123.123.2
Number of Connected Sites 2
IP
Line I/F
Communication Bit Rate 1024Kbps
Number of Lines
Save
5
28(128K)
Cancel
Set up other items.
For details on the setup, see step 3 in “Registering a New Remote Party”
on page 113.
6
Select “Save”, then press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander.
Registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.
To specify a remote party registered in the Phone Book to the multipoint
connection list
1
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the name
you want to register in the multipoint connection list.
2
Press the button on the Remote Commander. Or press the ENTER
button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v,
B or b button to select “ On”, then press the ENTER button.
Phone Book
Default Group
Room 101
ISDN 01-2345-6789
Cancel
On
Connect
Edit
Copy
Delete
The
(multipoint) mark is added to the lower right of the selected list,
and the remote party is registered in the multipoint connection list.
You can add the
marks to up to 2 parties using the same procedure as
above. The
marks that correspond to the number of the parties you have
registered appear as dark marks on the upper right of the Phone Book.
176
Configuring Multipoint
Number of specified points
Phone Book
Default Group
Room 101
Room 102
Office A
ISDN 01-2345-6789
IP 255.255.255.255
ISDN 98-7654-3210
Multipoint mark
Note
To delete the
mark from the name list, press the button on the Remote
Commander again, or press the ENTER button on the Remote Commander to
display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b button to select “
Off”, then press
the ENTER button.
3
Select one of the remote parties with the
button.
4
Press the V, v, B or b button to select “ Edit” from the submenu, then press
the ENTER button.
The List Edit menu appears. All the IP addresses or telephone numbers of
the parties marked with
are entered in the number text boxes.
mark, then press the ENTER
Phone Book
MULTI LIST
Group Select
None Specified
Dial to:
ISDN
01-2345-6789
One-Touch Dial Specified None Specified
Dial to:
IP
255.255.255.255
Number of Connected Sites 2
IP
Line I/F
Communication Bit Rate 1024Kbps
Number of Lines
Save
28(128K)
Cancel
5
Enter the name of the multipoint connection list in the Index text box.
6
Select “Save”, then press the ENTER button.
The registration of the multipoint connection list is completed.
Configuring Multipoint
177
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Index
Starting a Multipoint Connection
Calling Remote Parties
To call remote parties registered in the multipoint connection lists
1
Select the multipoint connection list registered in the Phone Book.
2
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander, or press the
ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press
the V, v, B or b button to select “Connect”, then press the ENTER button.
Phone Book
Default Group
Multipoint
Room 101
ISDN 01-2345-6789
Cancel
On
Connect
Edit
Copy
Delete
The system begins dialing the remote parties registered in the multipoint
connection list. “Dialing” appears on the monitor screen. When the system
connects to all the remote points, the message “Session Connected.”
appears on the screen, and the pictures of the remote parties are displayed
on the screen.
To call remote parties by selecting from the Phone Book
178
1
Select a remote party to which you want to connect for a multipoint
connection from the Phone Book.
2
Press the button on the Remote Commander, or press the ENTER button
on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press the V, v, B or b
button to select “ On”, then press the ENTER button.
Starting a Multipoint Connection
Phone Book
Default Group
Room 101
ISDN 01-2345-6789
Cancel
On
Connect
Edit
Copy
Delete
The
(multipoint) mark is added to the lower right of the selected name
in the Phone Book list and the remote party is specified to the party for the
multipoint connection.
You can add the
marks for up to five parties using the same procedure
as above. The
marks that correspond to the number of the parties you
have selected appear as dark marks on the upper right of the Phone Book.
Number of specified points
Phone Book
Default Group
Room 101
Room 102
Office A
ISDN 01-2345-6789
IP 255.255.255.255
ISDN 98-7654-3210
Note
To delete the
mark from the name list, press the button on the Remote
Commander again, or press the ENTER button to display the submenu, press the V,
v, B or b button to select “
Off”, then press the ENTER button.
3
Select one of the remote parties with the
4
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander, or press the
ENTER button on the Remote Commander to display the submenu, press
the V, v, B or b button to select “Connect”, then press the ENTER button.
The system begins dialing the remote parties with the
marks. “Dialing”
appears on the monitor screen.
When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Session
Connected.” appears on the screen, and the pictures of the remote parties
are displayed on the screen.
mark.
Starting a Multipoint Connection
179
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Multipoint mark
To call remote parties not registered in the Phone Book
Basic operations are the same as those for a point-to-point connection.
For details, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the Phone Book”
on page 105.
1
Select “Detailed Dial” in the Home menu or press the CONNECT (
button on the Remote Commander to open the Detailed Dial menu.
2
Select “Number of Connected Sites” and select the number of the points to
which you want to connect.
The “Dial to:” text boxes that correspond to the selected number of points
appear.
)
Detailed Dial
Home
Dial to:
IP
Number of Connected Sites 2
Dial to:
IP
Line I/F
IP
Communication Bit Rate 2Mbps
Number of Lines 1B(64K)
Phone Book
History
3
Cancel
Set up the line interface of the remote parties in the “Dial to:” text boxes.
Select the line interface from the drop-down list on the left, and enter the
number of a remote party in the text box.
For LAN connection: Select “IP” from the drop-down list, and enter the
IP address.
For ISDN connection: Select “ISDN” from the drop-down list, and enter
the line number.
For ISDN (Telephone) connection: Select “TEL” from the drop-down
list, and enter the telephone number (ex. : 0390123456).
Enter all the parties with which you want to make a multipoint connection.
Detailed Dial
Home
Dial to:
IP
123.123.123.1
Number of Connected Sites 2
Dial to:
IP
123.123.123.2
Line I/F
IP
Communication Bit Rate 2Mbps
Number of Lines 1B(64K)
Phone Book
History
Cancel
For details on the setup, see “Calling a Remote Party Not Registered in the
Phone Book” on page 105.
180
Starting a Multipoint Connection
4
Select “Connect”, and press the ENTER button on the Remote
Commander, or press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote
Commander.
The system begins dialing the remote parties selected in step 3. “Dialing”
appears on the monitor screen.
When the system connects to all the remote points, the message “Session
Connected.” appears on the screen, and the pictures of the remote parties
are displayed on the screen.
To call additional remote parties
After starting communication with the first party, press the CONNECT (
button on the Remote Commander to display the menu.
)
Previous
Enter Number/Address
Select from Phone Book
Select from History
Call the second remote party by using one of the procedures described in
“Starting a Connection by Calling a Remote Party” on page 97 depending on
the registration status of the party. When you press the CONNECT ( )
button on the Remote Commander after the communication starts with the
second remote party, the above menu opens again and you can call the next
party.
Notes
If some points are not connected
The following dialog appears. Only the connected points are shown as dark
circles. Select the desired item.
Starting a Multipoint Connection
181
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
• When “Direct Dial” or “One-Touch Dial” is set to “On” in the Home Menu setup
menu, selecting “Previous” from the above menu displays the necessary items for
direct dialing or the one-touch dial buttons on the monitor screen.
• The Phone Book opens when you press the
button during communication. It is
convenient for calling a remote party registered in the Phone Book.
Some positions were not connected.
Start Meeting
Disconnect All
Redial
Start Meeting: Starts communication with remote parties connected.
Disconnect All: Cancels all the connections and restores the Home menu.
Redial: Redials the numbers of the points that you failed to connect.
Note on multipoint videoconferences using ISDN
If the number of remote points connected increases as a result of dialing from
the main terminal while making a multipoint connection using ISDN, some of
the channels that have been used for connection will be cut off and used for the
newly connected points instead. For example, if you use six ISDN lines (up to
12B channels available), 12B channels will be used for the first remote point
only when no other points are connected. When the system connects to a
second point, the number of channels for the first point decreases, and 6B
channels will be used for both the first and second points.
Even if one of the remote points in a multipoint connection is disconnected, the
number of channels used for the remaining points will not increase.
Receiving a Call from a Remote Party
Operations are the same as those for a point-to-point connection.
For details, see “Receiving a Call from a Remote Party” on page 109.
182
Starting a Multipoint Connection
Using the Display Control
During a multipoint connection you can control the following operations.
Broadcast Mode
There are four broadcast modes, “Split” and “Voice Activate”, and “Split
(fixed)” and the broadcast select mode.
You can set up “Split” and “Voice Activate” modes in “Broadcast Mode” of
the Multipoint setup menu.
You can select “Split (fixed)” and broadcast select modes in the Layout menu
during communication.
Split mode
This mode allows display of the pictures of the connected remote terminals and
the picture of the local terminal by splitting the monitor screen.
You can select “Six-screen Mosaic” or “Four-screen Mosaic” in “Split” of the
Multipoint setup menu.
The split windows A to B display the pictures of the remote terminals in the
connected sequence.
Four-split window
Picture A
Picture B
Picture A
Picture B
Picture on the
local terminal
Notes
• When the six-split window is displayed, the system detects the terminal including the
loudest voice among all the terminals and displays the picture of that terminal in the
lower right window. The picture on the local terminal is then displayed in the window
where the picture of the detected terminal was displayed.
• If you switch the broadcast mode from “Split” to “Voice Activate” in which the
picture of a specified terminal is displayed in full screen during communication, the
location of Pictures A to B will be changed when “Split” mode is restored.
Using the Display Control
183
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Picture on the
local terminal
Six-split window
• When there is one terminal, the picture is displayed in full screen regardless of the
setting.
• When the six-split window with a terminal specified is displayed, the picture from the
specified terminal is always displayed in the lower-right window.
• When “Split” mode is selected, you cannot control the camera on any connected
remote terminals.
Voice Activate mode
This mode allows you to detect the terminal with the loudest voice among the
connected terminals and to display the picture of that terminal in full screen on
all other terminals. The “
” indicator appears when “Voice Activate”
mode is activated. The indicator with an alphabetic letter (ex. : ) indicating
the terminal of the displayed picture also appears. The
indicator is
displayed on the monitor screen while the local picture is broadcast.
Note
To transmit pictures with resolution of 720p (1280 × 720 pixels) in H.264 Video Mode
when “Voice Activate” is activated, select “Voice Activate (720P)” in “Broadcast
Mode” of the Multipoint setup menu. However, the “Voice Activate (720P)” mode
cannot be selected when the communication is made via an ISDN or SIP connection.
Even for an IP connection, this mode is not available if the remote party does not
support H.264 Video Mode.
Fixed split mode
The pictures from the connected remote terminals and the picture of the local
terminal are displayed in split windows on the monitor screen as the same
manner as those in “Split” mode.
You can specify a picture among the split windows to fix it in the lower right
window for the six-split mode. Pictures other than the specified one are
displayed in the split windows in the connected sequence.
Six-split window
The picture of the specified terminal is
always displayed in this window.
Broadcast select mode
You can specify a terminal to display the picture of that terminal in full screen
on all other terminals. The indicator with an alphabetic letter (ex. )
indicating the terminal of the displayed picture also appears. The
indicator
is displayed on the monitor screen while the local picture is broadcast.
184
Using the Display Control
Broadcast Modes and Displayed Windows
The chart described below shows the window displayed on the monitor screen
when you select one of the broadcast modes. According to the connection
status of your system, some modes cannot be selected. You cannot select the
broadcast mode if your connection status corresponds to that with no display
window in the chart below.
Connection status
Non-cascade connection
LAN connection (page 171)
ISDN connection (page 172)
LAN & ISDN connection (page 173)
Before communication
Broadcast mode
Connecting points (max.)
3
Four-screen Mosaic
Four-split window
Six-screen Mosaic
Six-screen mosaic
Split
(fixed)
For four-split
For six-split
–
Six-split window
Full screen
Broadcast Select
Full screen
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Voice Activate
Using the Display Control
185
Switching the Broadcast Mode
At the beginning of the connection, the broadcast mode set in “Broadcast
Mode” and “Split” of the Multipoint setup menu is applied. You can change
the mode during communication using the Layout menu.
Note
If “Broadcast Mode” of the Multipoint setup menu is set to “Voice Activate (720P)”,
you cannot switch “Broadcast Mode” during communication as the “Broadcast Mode”
does not appear in the Layout menu. Set “Broadcast Mode” before starting
communication.
1
Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander.
The Layout menu appears.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the mode
to which you want to switch from “Broadcast Mode”, then press the
ENTER button.
Layout
Screen Display Patterns
Full
PandP
Side by Side
PinP
PinP
PinP
PinP
PinP
Broadcast Mode
Split
Terminal
0
Save
Cancel
Split: Selects the Split mode.
Split (A fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected first in the
specified window of the fixed split mode.
Split (B fixed): Fixes the picture of the terminal connected second in the
specified window of the fixed split mode.
Split (Near End Fixed): Fixes the local picture in the specified window of the
fixed split mode.
Voice Activate: Selects “Voice Activate” mode.
Self Broadcast: Broadcasts the local picture in broadcast select mode.
186
Using the Display Control
A Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected first in
broadcast select mode.
B Broadcast: Broadcasts the picture of the terminal connected second in
broadcast select mode.
To display the local picture in “Voice Activate” mode
You can display the local picture only on your monitor screen even if “Voice
Activate” mode is activated. All other terminals remain in “Voice Activate”
mode.
1
Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander to display the
Layout menu.
The instruction “F1: Switches the monitored picture between the remote
and local sites.” appears in the lower part of the screen.
2
Press the F1 button on the Remote Commander.
The local picture appears on your monitor screen.
To restore “Voice Activate” mode on the local site
Press the F1 button on the Remote Commander again.
Receiving the Broadcast Requested From Another Terminal
When you receive the “Self Broadcast” command from one of the terminals
connected, the picture of that terminal is broadcast in full screen.
When you receive the “Stop Broadcast” command from one of the terminals
connected, the system returns to the previous mode.
Note
Using the Display Control
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
If you have received the “Self Broadcast” command from another terminal, the
operation above will not be carried out.
187
Ending the Multipoint Connection
1
Press the CONNECT ( ) button on the Remote Commander.
The following menu appears:
Disconnect A
Disconnect B
Disconnect All
Cancel
The alphabetic letters A to B indicate the connected sequence of terminals.
The terminal names are displayed in the menu if you set “Display Terminal
Name” to “Show temporarily” or “Always show” on the Menu Screens
page in the General setup menu.
2
Use the V, v, B or b button on the Remote Commander to select the
terminal to be disconnected, then press the ENTER button.
Disconnect A: Disconnects the terminal connected first.
Disconnect B: Disconnects the terminal connected second.
Disconnect All: Disconnects all the terminals.
The selected terminal is disconnected.
You can also disconnect all the terminals by pressing the DISCONNECT
( ) button on the Remote Commander.
To cancel the disconnection
Select “Cancel” in step 2, then press the ENTER button on the Remote
Commander.
188
Ending the Multipoint Connection
Notes on Secondary
Terminals
If there is a terminal that is not adequate for
the settings set by this system, that terminal
is called a secondary terminal.
Communication capabilities between
secondary terminal and this system are
shown below.
• Transmitting/receiving audio
• Receiving video from a secondary
terminal
• Disables transmission of video to a
secondary terminal
For details on secondary terminals, see
“Glossary” on page 245.
When a normal phone is connected
The audio mode of the Visual
Communication Systems is not affected if a
normal phone is connected or disconnected
at any time.
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
When a 56K network is mixed among
the terminals if the connection is
made via a 64K network
The connection automatically changes to
that via the 56 K network. Terminals that
cannot change to that network are regarded
as secondary terminals, and the transmission
of video is not available, although
transmission/reception of audio and
reception of video are available.
When a terminal with different audio
mode is connected and its video bit
rate is different
The connection is made in the audio mode of
the terminal with the lowest video bit rate.
Any terminal that cannot conform to the
audio mode is regarded as a secondary
terminal, and the transmission of video is not
available, although transmission/reception
of audio and reception of video are
available.
Notes on Secondary Terminals
189
Multipoint Attributes
Number
Attribute
1
Maximum number of terminals 2 (3 when including the
that can be connected to a single local terminal)
MCU
Value (H.320 MCU)
Value (H.323 MCU)
2 (3 when including the
local terminal)
2
Maximum number of
concurrent (independent)
connections that can be
supported in a single MCU
1
1
3
Maximum number of ports that 0
can be connected to other
MCUs
0
4.1
Network interfaces at each port
BRI
LAN
4.2
Restricted network capability
Restrict_Required
–
5
Transmission rates available at
each port
1B, 2B, 4B, 6B (BRI)
Restricted on maximum
value of total bit rate of
all points
6
Audio Processor
Equipped
Equipped
6.1
Mixed/switched
Noise/echo suppression on
“silent” ports
Mixed
No
Mixed
No
6.2
Audio algorithm at each port
G.711, G.728, G.722,
G.711, G.728, G.722,
MPEG4 AAC (monaural MPEG4 AAC (monaural
only)
only)
7
Video Processor (motion
pictures)
Equipped
7.1
Switched/mixed
Voice activated/fourVoice activated/foursplit/six-split/user control split/six-split/user control
7.2
Video algorithm at each port
H.261, H.263, H.264
H.261, H.263, H.264
8
Data Processor
Equipped
Equipped
8.1
Data broadcast facility, LSD
Data broadcast facility, HSD
Equipped
No
–
–
8.2
MLP Processor
Equipped
–
9
Encryption
Support
Support
190
Multipoint Attributes
Equipped
Number
Attribute
Value (H.320 MCU)
Value (H.323 MCU)
10
Method of choosing Selected
Communication Mode - SCM
Custom:
Number of lines (1B/
2B/4B/6B)
Audio algorithm
(G.711, G.728, G.722,
MPEG4 AAC)
Auto:
Video frame rate (7.5/
10/15/30fps)
Video encoding mode
(CIF/QCIF)
Fixed or switched
automatically:
Video algorithm
(H.261 fixed, H.261,
H.263 or H.264
switched
automatically)
Restrict (56K fixed/
Auto)
Custom:
LAN bandwidth
(Restricted on maximum
value of total bit rate of
all points)
Audio algorithm
(G.711, G.728, G.722,
MPEG4 AAC)
Auto:
Video frame rate (7.5/
10/15/30fps)
Video encoding mode
(CIF/QCIF)
Fixed or switched
automatically:
Video algorithm
(H.261 fixed, H.261,
H.263 or H.264
switched
automatically)
11
Capability of secondary
terminals
Capable of audio
transmitting/receiving
and video receiving only.
Capable of audio
transmitting/receiving
only via a normal phone.
Capable of audio
transmitting/receiving
and video receiving only.
Capable of audio
transmitting/receiving
only via a normal phone.
12
Call setup provision(s)
No call/receive
reservation
No call/receive
reservation
13
Control capabilities
–
13.1
Numbering of terminals
No
Simple chair control using BAS No
Equipped
No
13.2
MLP facilities (T.120)
No
No
13.3
H.224 (simplex data)
Equipped
Equipped
14
Cascading
No
No
14.1
Fixed rates (“simple”)
No
No
14.2
Master/Slave
No
No
15
Terminal identification
No
Equipped
16
MBE capability
No
–
–
Chapter 6: Multipoint Connection
Multipoint Attributes
191
Chapter 7:
Computer Display
Function
When you are not conducting a videoconference, you can use the monitor of
the Communication System as a computer display.
This chapter describes use of the Communication System other than as a
videoconference terminal.
192
Computer Display Function
By connecting the Communication System to a computer, you can view the
picture from the computer on the monitor of the system.
To display the picture from the computer on the monitor of the
Communication System, connect the RGB IN connector on the system to the
computer using a D-sub 15-pin cable (not supplied). You can also connect the
AUDIO IN connector on the system to the audio output connector on the
computer using an audio connection cord (not supplied), and output the
computer’s audio from the system’s speakers.
to AUDIO IN
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
RGB IN
to RGB IN
INPUT
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
Audio cable
(not supplied)
Connecting cable with the
D-sub 15-pin connectors
(not supplied)
to audio output
to RGB OUT
Computer
Displaying the Computer Picture
1
Press the PC/RGB button on the right side of the system.
The monitor switches to the computer picture display, and the PC/RGB
indicator on the front of the system lights green.
Computer Display Function
193
Chapter 7: Computer Display Function
Connecting the Computer
Outputting the Computer Audio
1
Set “Audio Input” to “AUX” or “MIC+AUX” in the Audio setup menu.
Notes
• When “AUX” is selected during a conference, audio from the computer is output
to the remote party. If “AUX” is selected and you want to use microphone audio
during a conference, change the setting to “MIC”.
• When “MIC+AUX” is selected during a conference, both the microphone audio
and the audio from the computer are output to the remote party.
194
2
Set “AUX Local Monitor Out” to “On” in the Audio setup menu.
3
Press the VOLUME +/– buttons on the Remote Commander to adjust the
volume of the computer audio.
Computer Display Function
Switching between Videoconference
and Computer Pictures
Two-Picture Display
You can view both the videoconference picture and the computer picture on
the monitor at the same time with one of the pictures displayed as the main
picture.
If you press the VC button while the videoconference picture is displayed, the
monitor switches to a two-picture display with the videoconference picture as
the main picture. If you press the PC/RGB button while the computer picture
is displayed, the monitor switches to a two-picture display with the computer
picture as the main picture.
You can also switch between two-picture displays as follows by pressing and
holding the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander.
Videoconference picture t two-picture (videoconference main) t twopicture (computer main) t computer picture
Note
If the system does not support the video signals output from the computer, two-picture
display may not be possible.
For details on supported video signals, see “Acceptable signals during
computer display” on page 232.
Automatic Switching from the Computer Picture
If the following occur while the computer picture is displayed on the monitor
in full screen or as the main picture in a two-picture display, the display will
automatically switch to a two-picture display with the videoconference picture
as the main picture.
• Remote Commander operations excluding MIC ON/OFF and VOLUME
+/– are performed.
• The power switch on the Communication System is pressed.
• The system enters standby mode.
• An error message appears in the videoconference.
Switching between Videoconference and Computer Pictures
195
Chapter 7: Computer Display Function
You can press the PC/RGB button or VC button on the right side of the system
to switch between the computer and videoconference pictures.
Starting a Videoconference during
Computer Display
Calling a Remote Party during Computer Display
You cannot call a remote party when only the computer picture is displayed on
the monitor of the system. Press the VC button on the side of the system to
switch to videoconference display before calling the remote party.
Receiving a Call during Computer or Two-Picture Display
When a call is received from a remote party, the display will automatically
switch to a two-picture display with the videoconference picture as the main
picture. Operations for answering the call differ depending on whether auto
answer mode or manual answer mode is configured.
For details on operations after receiving a call, see “Receiving a Call from a
Remote Party” on page 109.
196
Starting a Videoconference during Computer Display
Adjusting the Picture Quality of the
Display
1
Press the MENU button on the system to display the menu screen.
Note
The menu also appears during two-picture display and videoconference display.
2
Use the V and v buttons on the system to select a settings menu, and press
the ENTER button or b button.
The selected menu appears.
3
Use the V and v buttons on the system to select a setting, and press the
ENTER button.
4
Configure the selected setting, and press the ENTER button.
The configuration of the selected setting is applied.
To finish picture quality adjustment, press the MENU button.
L R
REC
OUT
AUDIO
IN
INPUT
RGB IN
PC/
RGB
INPUT
VC
PC/
RGB
RGB OUT
VC
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
ENTER
MENU
Adjusting the Picture Quality of the Display
197
Chapter 7: Computer Display Function
You can adjust the picture quality using the buttons on the right side of the
system.
Picture menu
Picture mode
Select the picture quality.
Dynamic: Display a dynamic picture with emphasis on definition and
contrast.
Standard: Display a standard picture with emphasis on naturalness.
Reset
Reset the “Picture mode” setting to the factory default setting.
Backlight
Configure the brightness of the backlight.
Moving left on the adjustment bar decreases the brightness of the screen, and
moving right increases it.
Contrast
Configure the contrast level.
Moving left on the adjustment bar decreases the contrast, and moving right
increases it.
Brightness
Configure the brightness.
Moving left on the adjustment bar decreases brightness, and moving right
increases it.
Color Temp.
Adjust the white balance.
High: Select bluish color tones.
Medium: Select median color tones.
Low: Select reddish color tones.
Screen menu
Configure display settings that will be used during computer picture display.
Note
Screen menu settings only apply to full-screen computer picture display. The menu does
not appear during videoconference or two-picture display.
Wide Mode
Select the display mode.
Full1: Fill the vertical length of the screen with the full vertical length of the
picture while maintaining the aspect ratio. Black bars may appear on the
margins of the screen.
Full2: Fill the entire screen with the picture.
Zoom: Fill the entire screen with the picture while maintaining the aspect
ratio. The top and bottom of the picture will be cut off.
198
Adjusting the Picture Quality of the Display
Note
If the aspect ratio of the input signal from the computer is 16:9 or wider, this setting is
fixed at “Full1”.
Note
This setting may be disabled depending on the input signal.
Adjust Signal
APA
Automatically adjust phase, pitch, and shift to optimal values for the picture
signal input from the computer (auto pixel alignment).
Phase
Adjust pixel and computer signal positions. Set the value that produces the
clearest picture.
Pitch
Adjust the horizontal size of the picture. Set a value that matches the pixel
count of the input signal.
Shift
Adjust the picture position.
H: Adjust the horizontal position. Increasing the value moves the picture to the
right, while decreasing the value moves it to the left.
V: Adjust the vertical position. Increasing the value moves the picture upward,
while decreasing the value moves it downward.
Setup menu
Power Saving
On: When no RGB input signal is detected and there are no key operations for
10 minutes, the system automatically enters power saving mode.
Off: The system does not enter power saving mode, even if an RGB input
signal is not detected and key operations are not performed for prolonged
periods.
Note
This function is disabled during videoconference picture display and two-picture
display.
Adjusting the Picture Quality of the Display
199
Chapter 7: Computer Display Function
V Center
Adjust the vertical position of the picture.
Information menu
Notes
• Information on the main picture is displayed during two-picture display.
• fH (horizontal frequency) and fV (vertical frequency) information may not appear
properly depending on the input signal.
For details on supported video signals, see “Acceptable signals during
computer display” on page 232.
fH (horizontal frequency)
Displays the horizontal frequency.
fV (vertical frequency)
Displays the vertical frequency.
Signal type
Displays the resolution of the input signal.
200
Adjusting the Picture Quality of the Display
Chapter 8:
Web Control
Function
Internet Explorer is a product of the Microsoft Corporation. Please use Version
5.0, or above (Version 6.0 recommended).
201
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
This chapter describes the Web Control Functions used when operating the
PCS-XL55. The Web Control Function helps you control the PCS-XL55, or
change its setup configuration, using a Web browser installed on your PC, such
as Internet Explorer.
Opening the Web Page
Enter the IP address assigned to the PCS-XL55 in the address line of your
browser.
Example: For IPv4 addresses
http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
(“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the IPv4 address.)
Example: For IPv6 addresses
http://[xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx]/
(“xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx” represents the IPv6
address.)
Note
When a proxy server in an external network segment has been set, the Gateway address
in the PSC-XL55 LAN setup must also be set. Or set your Web browser proxy setting
to “No Proxy” for the PCS-XL55.
202
Opening the Web Page
Identifying a User
Once you reach the Web page, the following window will be displayed asking
you to identify yourself as the user.
You can select a user name from the following and enter the password for the
selected user name.
[remote]
Enter the Remote Access Password set in the Administrator setup menu. You
can access and check the “Phonebook” and “Setup” pages.
[address]
Enter the Phone Book Modification Password set in the Administrator setup
menu. You can access the “Phonebook” page, change the setting of the page,
and register a new entry onto the page. And you can check the “Setup” pages.
[sonypcs]
Enter the Administrator Password set in the Administrator setup menu. You
can access the “Phonebook” page, change the setting of the page, and register
a new entry onto the page. And you can check and modify the “Setup” pages.
Identifying a User
203
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
Enter one of the following user names (see below) into the “User Name” box
and the corresponding password into the “Password” box, then click the [OK]
button.
Each character of a password is shown as “*” on the screen.
When the user name and password are correct, the “Home” menu will come
up.
If an incorrect user name or password is entered, you are asked to enter it again.
When the incorrect entries are made three times, an error message appears on
the screen.
[streaming]
Enter the Streaming Broadcast Password of the terminal transmitting via
streaming broadcast. You can receive and view the contents of the transmitted
communication.
[setting]
Enter the Save Settings Password set in the Administrator setup menu.
You can check and modify the settings in the “Phonebook” page or register
new entries. You can also check the settings in the “Setup” page and modify
settings other than administrator settings.
Notes
• If passwords have not been registered, leave the “Password” box blank and click the
[OK] button.
• The Administrator Password, Phone Book Modification Password, Save Settings
Password, Remote Access Password, and Streaming Broadcast Password are
registered in the Password page of the Administrator setup menu.
• When you enter a password to access the Web page, the password authorization will
be valid until you quit the Web browser. If you simply close the Web browser without
quitting, the access authorization will still be valid when you open the Web browser
again.
• Depending on the operating environment, unauthorized third parties on the network
may be able to access the system. We strongly recommend configuring all of the
passwords for security purposes. Configure all the passwords on the Password page
(page 77) of the Administrator setup menu.
204
Identifying a User
Selecting a Menu
By clicking a menu name on the left part of the page, you can display the
corresponding menu page.
Menu items
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
[Home]
Displays the “Home” menu to select the line I/F to connect to a remote party,
enter the address of the remote party and dial. The information icons for this
system are also displayed.
[Download]
Displays the “Download” menu to download logs.
[Control Pad]
Displays the control panel to control the system.
[Remote Controller]
Displays the image of the Remote Commander (PCS-RF1) supplied with the
system. It allows you to perform the same operations as those on the Remote
Commander.
Selecting a Menu
205
How to Use [Home] Menu
When you click [Home] on the left part of the page, the Home menu appears.
You can also display the Home menu by entering the correct password on the
name entry screen.
To dial by entering a number
1 Select the line interface (IP, ISDN or SIP).
2 Enter the telephone number or address of a remote party into the text box.
3 Click the [Connect] button.
206
How to Use [Home] Menu
How to Use [Download] Menu
When you click [Download] on the left part of the page, the Download menu
appears.
Various log files can be shown.
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
Select the log file you want to display, and click the [Download] button. You
can check the log files in a separate window.
How to Use [Download] Menu
207
How to Use [Remote Commander] Menu
When you click [Remote Commander] on the left part of the screen, the
Remote Commander image appears.
By clicking the various buttons on the Remote Commander image, you can
control the system in the same way you can when using a real Remote
Commander (PCS-RF1), operating the camera, and dialing phone numbers.
208
How to Use [Remote Commander] Menu
Selecting a Tool
By clicking the tools button on the top part of the page, you can jump to the
corresponding tools page.
[Connect/Disconnect]
Calls a remote party using direct dialing and ends a communication.
For a private phone book, the “Phonebook” button changes to the “Private
Phonebook” button.
[Shared Phonebook]
You can use the Shared Phone Book.
[History]
Displays the Dial, Answer and Missed Call history lists.
Dials from the history.
Deletes an unnecessary history record.
[Setup]
Confirms or modifies the setup.
[Information]
Confirms the machine information, peripheral status and communication
mode.
You can also check the network routing, and can display the recorded files in
a “Memory Stick”.
[Monitor]
You can monitor the picture on the Communication System.
Note
When “Web Monitor” is set to “Off” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator
setup menu, you cannot use the [Monitor] page.
[Streaming]
You can watch the live stream of a communication.
Notes
• QuickTime version 6.0 or above is needed to view a communication.
• When “Streaming” is “Disabled” on the Streaming/Recording page of the
Administrator setup menu, the communication cannot be watched. If “Video” is set
to “Off” on the Streaming/Recording page, only the audio stream of the
communication is broadcast, and video cannot be watched.
Selecting a Tool
209
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
[Phonebook]
Displays the dial list of the Phonebook.
Connects from the Phonebook.
Registers, confirms, or edits the dial list.
How To Configure KIOSK Mode
You can select the background of the Home menu and the logo that is
displayed while the system is running.
Notes
• The KIOSK Mode setting can only be configured using the Web Control Function.
• For detailed information on the KIOSK Mode setting, consult your Sony dealer.
1 Click [Setup] at the top of the screen.
2 Click [Admin:Etc] that appears on the left side of the screen.
The “Admin:Etc” screen appears.
(You can only configure this setting when “sonypcs” has been entered as
the user name.)
3 Set “KIOSK Mode” to “On”.
4 Click the [Save] button.
After saving is complete, the page display is refreshed.
210
Selecting a Tool
How to Use [Version Up] Page
When you click [Setup] on the top part of the page, [Version Up] appears on
the lower left of the page.
Clicking [Version Up] displays the [Version Up] page.
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
Version Up
Click [Reference] and select the software you want to upgrade, then click the
[Upload] button.
When upload is complete, a message appears and the version upgrade begins.
After the upgrade is complete, the system reboots. Do not turn off the power
until rebooting is complete.
You can also upload Phone Books and configuration files by selecting them
with [Reference].
How to Use [Version Up] Page
211
How to Use [Streaming] Page
1 On the user name entry screen, enter “streaming” in the [User Name] box
and the Streaming Password of the terminal transmitting via streaming
broadcast in the [Password] box.
2 Click the [Streaming] button to start QuickTime and start watching a
communication.
Notes
• QuickTime version 6.0 or above is required to view a communication. If QuickTime
is not installed on your computer, download it for free from the following Web site:
http://www.apple.com/quicktime/download/
• When “Streaming” is “Disabled” on the Streaming/Recording page of the
Administrator setup menu, the communication cannot be watched. If “Video” is set
to “Off” on the Streaming/Recording page, only the audio stream of the
communication is broadcast, and video cannot be watched.
• Depending on Web access limitations, about 10 terminals can view a streaming
broadcast simultaneously. The actual number of terminals that can view the broadcast
simultaneously depends on your system’s operating environment.
212
How to Use [Streaming] Page
How to Use [Monitor] Page
Chapter 8: Web Control Function
When you click [Monitor] of the tools buttons, the [Monitor] page opens. You
can monitor the picture on the Communication System.
Note
When “Web Monitor” is set to “Off” on the Access Permit page of the Administrator
setup menu, or while the encrypted connection is made, you cannot use the [Monitor]
page.
How to Use [Monitor] Page
213
f LAN ALERT indicator
Appendix
When the system is connected to LAN
via the
connector on the rear, this
indicator lights in yellow when packet
error (loss) or link error occurs during
communication.
Location and
Function of Parts
and Controls
g ON LINE indicator
Blinks in blue while dialing or receiving
a call, and stays lit in blue during
communication.
h PC/RGB indicator
PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System
Indicates the display mode of the
monitor.
Lights green when the monitor is being
used as a computer display. The
indicator flashes in yellow if there is a
malfunction with the monitor.
Front
1
23
4
i Speakers
TABLET
PRO
TABLET
2
2(L)
2(L)
1(R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
9
1
1(R)
MIC(A1/A3)
(PLUG IN POWER)
5
6
7
8
PRO
Left side
3
4
a Microphone
b Lever for lens cover
Opens and closes the camera lens cover.
a Memory Stick slot
c Camera lens
d Monitor
e ?/1 (power) indicator
Starts blinking in green when the power
switch is pressed to on, then lights in
green. Lights in orange when the system
is set to standby mode.
214
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
Insert a “Memory Stick” (not supplied)
into this slot.
A “Memory Stick Duo” can also be
inserted.
b TABLET connector
Connect to a pen tablet (not supplied) for
annotation, or the Key Module (not
supplied) for software installation.
c MIC (A1/A3) 1 (R)/2 (L) jacks
(minijack)
d
d B/b buttons
Moves the cursor when navigating the
monitor adjustment menu.
Connect to PCS-A1 microphones (not
supplied) or PCSA-A3 microphones
(not supplied), or to commercially
available headsets. Power is supplied to
the microphones from the System.
e ENTER button
(headphone) jack (stereo mini
jack)
f MENU button
Connects to commercially available
headphones or headsets.
Confirms selections when navigating the
monitor adjustment menu.
Displays the monitor adjustment menu.
g REC OUT L/R connectors (phono
jack)
Right side
L R
REC
OUT
7
8
AUDIO
IN
L R
REC
OUT
RGB IN
PC/
RGB
ENTER
ISDN UNIT
MENU
PC/
RGB
VC
0
qa
ENTER
MENU
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
6
Connect to the audio outputs of the
optional VCR or audio equipment.
INPUT
ISDN UNIT
19.5V
!
AUX CONTROL
1
2
3
4
5
RGB OUT
RGB OUT
VC
RGB IN
AUDIO
IN
INPUT
h AUDIO IN L/R jacks (phono jack)
9
qs
qd
qf
i RGB IN connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Connect to the RGB output of the
optional computer or video equipment.
j RGB OUT connector (D-sub
15-pin)
Connect to the RGB input of the
optional projector or display unit.
a ?/1 (power) switch
Turns on/off the system.
b PC/RGB button
Switches the monitor from
videoconference display to computer
picture display.
When navigating the monitor
adjustment menu, this button can be
used to move the cursor.
c VC button
Switches the monitor from computer
picture display to videoconference
display.
When navigating the monitor
adjustment menu, this button can be
used to move the cursor.
k
(LAN) connector
(100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, 8-pin
modular)
Used to connect via a LAN or a SIP.
Connect to a hub or a SIP server using
the category 5 cable.
l ISDN UNIT connector
Connect to the TERMINAL connector
on the optional PCSA-B384S or
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit.
m AUX CONTROL connector (D-sub
9-pin)
Used for maintenance service.
n DC 19.5V jack
Connect the supplied AC Power Adaptor.
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
215
Appendix
Used when recording the audio signals
to minute a communication. The mixed
sounds of the local and remote parties
are output from these connectors.
c LAYOUT button
PCS-RF1 RF Remote
Commander (Supplied)
Displays the Layout menu to select the
screen display pattern.
0
1
2
3
PRESENTATION
F1
F2
F3
4
5
7
8
9
F4
LAYOUT VIDEO INPUT CAMERA
VOLUME
6
qa
/
ZOOM
T
qs
qd
qf
W
CONNECT
TOOLS
BACK
SPACE DISCONNECT
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7PQRS
8 TUV
9WXYZ
TONE
Adjust the volume of the sound received
from a remote party.
+: to increase the volume
–: to decrease the volume
e Arrow buttons (V/v/B/b)
Used to select the menu or make various
settings in the menu.
f ENTER button
ENTER
RETURN
d VOLUME +/– buttons
qg
qh
qj
h CONNECT (
DOT
MIC
g RETURN button
Used to return to the previous step.
0
ON/OFF
Executes the selection or setting in the
menu and goes to the next step.
qk
i Number (0-9,
PCS-RF1
RF
You can set the volume of beep that sounds
by pressing a button on the Remote
Commander using the menu. You can also
set for the beep not to sound.
For the setting, see “Beep Sound” in the
Audio setup menu on page 64.
a PRESENTATION button
Starts or stops transmission of
presentation data.
b F1 to F4 (function) buttons
The function buttons are used for
various operations according to the
situation.
The current function of the buttons is
guided at the bottom of the menu screen.
216
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
) button
Used to connect a remote party for
communication.
,
) buttons
Used to enter the letters or numbers of a
telephone number, etc.
j Battery compartment (rear)
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries.
k @/1 (power on/off) button
Sets the System to standby mode when it
is turned on. Turns on the System when
it is in standby.
l VIDEO INPUT button
Displays the Video Input menu to switch
the video input signal to be displayed on
the monitor TV.
m CAMERA button
Displays the Camera menu to adjust the
camera zoom, brightness, etc.
n ZOOM (T/W) buttons
Zooms in or out.
T: to enlarge the picture
W: to reduce the picture
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit
(Optional)
Front/Upper panel
o TOOLS button
Displays the Tools menu.
p DISCONNECT (
) button
Used to disconnect a remote party in
communication.
q BACK SPACE button
Deletes the letter entered last.
r MIC ON/OFF button
Appendix
Turns off the local sound to be sent to a
remote party. To restore the sound, press
the button again.
Rear
a POWER indicator
Lights in orange when power is supplied
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is
complete, blinks in green.
b STATUS 1-3 indicators
Lights in orange when link
synchronization of each ISDN connector
is established. Lights in yellow when
each ISDN line is connected.
c ISDN 1-3 terminals (8-pin modular
jack)
Connect to the ISDN lines using the
ISDN modular cable.
d TERMINAL connector
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector
on the System with the interface cable
supplied with the ISDN Unit.
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
217
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit
(Optional)
Front/Upper panel
Rear
a POWER indicator
Lights in orange when power is supplied
to the ISDN Unit. When initializing is
complete, blinks in green.
b STATUS 1-6 indicators
Lights in orange when link
synchronization of each ISDN connector
is established. Lights in yellow when
each ISDN line is connected.
c ISDN 1-6 terminals (8-pin modular
jack)
Connect to the ISDN lines using the
ISDN modular cable.
d TERMINAL connector
Connect to the ISDN UNIT connector
on the System with the interface cable
supplied with the ISDN Unit
218
Location and Function of Parts and Controls
Indicators
The following icons appear on the monitor depending on the functions being used.
Indicator
NEAR
NEAR
Name
Description
Near camera
control
Local camera being controlled
Far camera
control
Remote camera being controlled
Mic off
(Near)
Local microphone is turned off in
communication or not in
communication.
off in communication or not in
communication.
Volume
Volume of remote party’s voice
being adjusted
Audio level
(stereo)
Audio input level of stereo sound
Audio level
(monaural)
Audio input level of monaural
sound
Character
input mode
Character input available
LAN status
(LAN)
LAN connected via the
connector using Internet Protocol
version 4 (IPv4).
LAN status
(LAN, IPv6)
LAN connected via the
connector using Internet Protocol
version 6 (IPv6).
ISDN status
Used ISDN ports
Audio input
Selected audio input (example of
the input from the MIC(A1/A3)
connector)
Video input
Selected video input (example of
the video from the RGB IN
connector)
Indicators
219
Appendix
Mic off (Far) Remote microphone is turned
Indicator
Name
Description
ISDN
(telephone)
mode
Audio only communication in
progress
“Memory
Stick”
“Memory Stick” is inserted into
the System.
Preset load
Recalling the preset camera
settings (1-6)
–
Presentation Presentation Executing
(transmitting) (transmitting the presentation data
to a remote party)
Presentation
(receiving)
Receiving the presentation data
from a remote party
Streaming
Stream broadcast in progress
Recording
Recording in progress
Tablet
Pen tablet connected
Drawing
(near)
Drawing rights belong to the local
party.
Drawing (far) Drawing rights belong to the
remote party.
Pointer (near) Local party’s pointer
220
Indicators
Pointer (far)
Remote party’s pointer
Encryption
Connected with encryption
Indicator
–
Description
Packet loss
Packet loss occurring
Voice
Activate
mode
“Voice Activate” is selected in
“Broadcast Mode” in a multipoint
connection.
Broadcast
(Near)
Local picture is broadcast in a
multipoint connection.
Broadcast
(A-B)
Terminal A (-B) connected first
(-second) is broadcast in a
multipoint connection.
No signal
No computer input signal
Unsupported
signal input
Computer input signal not
supported by system
Startup
System starting up
Indicators
Appendix
Name
221
On-Screen Messages
Check the following if a message appears on the monitor when operating the
Communication System.
Message
Cannot complete connection. (The following code and message appear.)
0
Unknown network error: Try again later.
1
Number does not exist: Check the number and try again.
2
Network congestion: Try again later.
3
Try again later.
16
Normal disconnection: (The line has been disconnected normally.)
17
Line is busy: Try again later.
18,19 System not responding: Check if the remote system is connected.
20
No such subscriber: Confirm the site number.
21
Call rejected: Check if the remote system is connected.
22
Called party number changed: Check the number and try again.
26
Connection restoration request: Try again later.
27
Remote system out of order: Check if the remote system is operational.
28
Invalid number entered: Check the number and try again.
31, 41 – 43, 47
Network not available: Try again later.
33, 34
Line is busy. Try to dial again later.
44
Network not available: Line is busy. Try again later.
50
Not a Subscriber: Check the remote party’s facility contract.
57,58 Bearer capability not authorized: Check if “Restrict” is set correctly.
70
Restricted capability: Set “Restrict” to “56K” and try again.
88
Terminal attribute error: Check the connection of the remote system.
91, 95 – 102, 111
Protocol error: Turn off and restart the system and try again.
128
H.221 negotiation timeout: Restart the system and connect again.
131
Board mismatch: Check the optional line interface boards.
132
Invalid SPID: Reregister the SPID.
134
Physical link synchronization error: Check the connection of the ISDN cable.
144, 145
The remote terminal may not be compatible with the BONDING function.
177
222
LAN connection timeout: Try again later.
On-Screen Messages
Message
178
LAN connection rejected: Try again later.
179
DNS error.
180
Dialing your own number is invalid.
181
GateKeeper error.
192
PPPoE server admission has failed. Check the PPPoE User Name and Password are
entered correctly.
195
Now obtaining an IP address via DHCP.
196
Configure the DNS address or use the IP address to dial.
205
Check the user name or user number for dialing is correct.
207
The remote terminal may not be registered in gatekeeper. Contact the gatekeeper
administrator.
201, 217
Call not responded.
218
Local number is not set correctly in the ISDN Setup menu. Set it correctly. Line
connected with 1B (64K).
219
Local number setting for ISDN configuration may not be correct in the remote party.
Line connected with 1B (64K).
230, 231
PPPoE server admission fails. Dial again after confirmation of the PPPoE settings.
232
Access to the DNS server has failed. Check the PPPoE DNS settings.
233
Connection to the remote party via DNS disabled. Dial using IP address.
234
Dialing the same address is invalid.
235
Regarded as a secondary terminal as the number of lines for ISDN configuration is
different.
236
Regarded as a secondary terminal as Far End Camera Control is set to Off.
237
Check the line interface or the IP address is set correctly.
238
The conference could not start because the encryption feature at the near-end side was
disabled.
239
The conference could not start because the encryption feature at the far-end side was
disabled.
240
The conference could not start because the signal encryption method at the near-end side
differed from that of the far-end side.
241
The standard encryption videoconference with SIP connection is not available.
242
The Proprietary encryption videoconference with ISDN connection is not available.
243
Connection with the current communication mode is not available via the specified line
interface.
244
Disconnected due to failure to receive packet from remote site.
On-Screen Messages
223
Appendix
209 – 212
Gatekeeper does not respond. Contact the gatekeeper administrator, or use the IP address
to dial.
Troubleshooting
If the Communication System does not function correctly, check the following.
Symptom
Cause
Solution
The power is not
turned on.
The power switch is not set to on.
Press the power switch to turn on the
power of the system (page 34).
The batteries in the Remote
Commander are low or dead.
Replace the batteries with new ones
(page 30).
Pairing with the Remote
Commander fails.
Perform pairing of the Remote
Commander with the Communication
System (page 31).
The Remote
Commander does
not operate.
No sound or the
The volume of the system is too
volume is very low. low.
Picture is blurred.
Adjust the sound volume by pressing
the VOLUME +/– buttons on the
Remote Commander (page 37).
The microphone on the remote
party is turned off.
Ask the remote party to turn on the
microphone.
Audio input is not selected
properly.
• Set up “Input Select (MIC)” on the
Basic Setup1 page of the Audio
setup menu properly (page 63).
• Set up “Audio Input” properly on
the Basic Setup1 page of the Audio
setup menu (page 62).
The microphone or external
equipment is not connected
correctly.
Check the connection (pages 153 and
158).
Manual focus is selected but picture Adjust the focus (page 131).
remains blurred.
When auto focus is selected, the
Select manual focus and adjust
background is too bright, contrast is manually (page 131).
too high, or the background or the
participants’ clothes contain fine
line patterns.
No picture.
The selected picture source is not
tuned on.
Turn on the selected video equipment.
Video input is not selected properly. Select the video input properly (page
132).
224
The selected picture source is not
correctly connected to the system.
Check the connections (page 158).
A voice meeting is held.
This is not a malfunction.
Movement of the camera is
prevented.
Turn off the system, then turn it on
again.
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Cause
Solution
No connection.
Wrong number was dialed.
Check the entered number.
The setting of “Line I/F” is not
Set “Line I/F” to correct interface
correct (when using direct dialing). referring to “Calling a Remote Party”
(page 100).
The registered items in the Phone
Book are not correct.
Register the party correctly referring
to “Registering a Remote Party –
Phone Book” (page 112).
Some of the system settings are not Set the system settings correctly
correct.
referring to “Registering Local
Information” (page 54).
Ask the system administrator to set
them correctly (page 66).
The LAN or ISDN cable is
disconnected.
Connect correctly (pages 27, 28).
The LAN or ISDN cable is
connected to the incorrect
connector.
Connect correctly (pages 27, 28).
The LAN or ISDN cable is down.
Replace the cable with a new one.
The cable exclusively designed for
the ISDN connection is used for
LAN connection (when using
LAN).
Use the cable for LAN connection.
Incorrect type of cable (cross or
straight cable) is used for the LAN
or ISDN connection.
Use the correct type of cable.
Appendix
The IP address and network mask
are not set correctly (when using
LAN).
The DSU is turned off (when using Turn on the DSU.
ISDN).
If you disconnect the
Turn off the power of the system and
communication with an abnormal
wait for a few minutes before turning
procedure, e.g., unplugging an
it on again.
ISDN cable or turning off the
system during communication, you
may not connect to the ISDN line
for a while (when using ISDN).
If you repeat plugging/unplugging
or turning on/off, you may not
connect to the network for a while
(when using LAN).
Turn off the power of the system and
wait for a few minutes before turning
it on again.
LAN connection timeout (when
using LAN).
Try again later.
Packet for communication is not
acceptable under the current LAN
environment (when using LAN).
Consult with the system administrator
so that the packet for Communication
becomes acceptable under your LAN
environment.
The remote terminal is not turned
on.
Ask the remote party to turn on the
terminal.
Troubleshooting
225
Symptom
Cause
Solution
No connection.
It takes a long time for the remote
party to be able to answer from the
standby mode.
Ask the remote party to cancel the
standby mode.
The remote party is in
communication with another party.
Call the remote party after they end
the communication with another
party.
Answering the call is not permitted Ask the remote party to permit
by the remote terminal as it is
answering a call.
operating for setups, etc.
The remote terminal is not set to
auto answer mode.
Ask the remote party to set the
terminal to auto answer mode, or to
answer a call manually.
The ISDN telephone numbers are
not set up in the remote terminal
(when using bonding).
Ask the remote party to set up “Area
Code” and “Local Number” in the
ISDN Setup menu correctly (page
72).
The eighth digit and up of the ISDN
telephone numbers are not the same
when connecting using bonding
(when the remote party uses the
communication system of an older
model such as the PCS-1600).
Connect without using bonding, or
use the ISDN telephone numbers that
are the same in the eighth digit and
up.
There is some problem with the
remote terminal.
Try to dial the number of another
terminal.
A message appears on the screen.
See “On-Screen Messages” (page
222).
Still pictures or the The write-protect tab on the
Phone Book cannot “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
be saved to the
The “Memory Stick” has already
“Memory Stick.”
been recorded to full capacity.
226
Troubleshooting
Release the lock (page 243).
Use another “Memory Stick.”
Specifications
Network
Multiplexing
Video, audio, data
Frame format
PCS-XL55 HD Visual
Communication System
This unit is compliant with ITU-T
Recommendations H.320 and H.323.
Motion picture
Sound
Bandwidth
22 kHz (MPEG4 AAC)
14 kHz (MPEG4 AAC)
7 kHz (G.722 compliant with
ITU-T Recommendation)
3.4 kHz (G.711/G.728 compliant
with ITU-T Recommendation)
Transmission rate
56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.711
compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
48 Kbps, 56 Kbps, 64 Kbps (G.722
compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
64 Kbps, 96 Kbps (MPEG4 AAC)
(when using LAN)
16 Kbps (G.728 compliant with
ITU-T Recommendation)
48 Kbps (MPEG4 AAC) (when
using ISDN)
Remote control
Far end camera control
H.281 (compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
Camera
Image device 1/3.2 type, color CMOS image
sensor
8,000,000 pixels
Lens
f = 2.94 mm (22 mm in 35 mm
format)
F = 1:2.8
Horizontal angle: 80.1 degrees
Vertical angle: 62.7 degrees
Focal distance
80 mm
Zoom function
Digital
Auto white balance function built-in
Auto exposure function built-in
Frame rate
30 fps
Display
Size
21.6-inch widescreen
Resolution
1366 × 768 (WXGA)
Viewing angle 176 degrees
Number of colors
16,700,000 colors
Specifications
227
Appendix
Operating bandwidth
64 Kbps to 4 Mbps (standard,
LAN connection)
56 Kbps to 768 Kbps (when
installing the PCSA-B768S,
ISDN connection)
56 Kbps to 384 Kbps (when
installing the PCSA-B384S,
ISDN connection)
Coding
H.261/H.263/H.263+/H.263++/
H.264
MPEG4 Simple Profile (when
using SIP)
Picture elements
CIF: 352 pixels × 288 lines
QCIF: 176 pixels × 144 lines
4CIF: 704 pixels × 576 lines
WCIF (W288p): 512 pixels × 288
lines
W432p: 768 pixels × 432 lines
W4CIF: 1024 pixels × 576 lines
720p: 1280 pixels × 720 lines
H.221 (compliant with ITU-T
Recommendation)
Interface
LAN (standard), 64 Kbps to
4 Mbps
ISDN (BRI), up to 3 lines (when
installing the PCSA-B384S)
up to 6 lines (when installing the
PCSA-B768S)
Data transmission rate
LSD 1.2 Kbps, 4.8 Kbps, 6.4 Kbps
MLP 6.4 Kbps, 24 Kbps, 32 Kbps
HMLP 62.4 Kbps, 64 Kbps,
128 Kbps
LAN protocol supported
HTTP
Telnet
RTP/RTCP
TCP/UDP
SNMP
Display controller
Input
RGB mode
Internal: Videoconference
External RGB: Computer display
640 × 350, 640 × 400, 640 × 480,
800 × 600, 832 × 624,
1024 × 768, 1280 × 720,
1280 × 768, 1280 × 1024
PCS-RF1 Remote
Commander (Supplied)
Signal format
Control
Compliant with IEEE802.15.4
DC 3V using two size AA (R6)
batteries
Speakers
Speakers
×2
Microphone
Frequency range
8 kHz
Directional characteristic
Unidirectional
General
Power requirements
DC 19.5 V
Current consumption
5A
Operating temperature
5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C
(–4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 557 × 410 × 117 mm (W × H × D)
(22 × 16 1/4 × 4 5/8 inches)
(not including stand)
557 × 456.5 × 214 mm
(W × H × D)
(22 × 18 × 8 1/2 inches)
(including stand)
Mass
Approx. 8.2 kg (18 lb 1.2 oz)
Supplied accessories
PCS-RF1 RF Remote Commander
(1)
Size AA (R6) batteries for RF
Remote Commander (2)
AC adaptor (1)
Power cord (1)
CD-ROM (1)
Before Using this Unit (1)
Quick Connection Guide/Remote
Commander Guide (1)
Warranty booklet (1)
User registration form (1)
(Japan only)
228
Specifications
VGP-AC19V54 AC Adaptor
Power requirements
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A
Output
DC 19.5 V, 7.7 A
Operating temperature
5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C
(–4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 160 × 80 × 40 mm (W × H × D)
(6 3/8 × 3 1/4 × 1 5/8 inches)
(not including projections)
Mass
Approx. 700 g (1 lb 8.7 oz)
PCS-A1 Microphone
(Optional)
Bandwidth
13 kHz
Directional characteristic
Omnidirectional
Dimensions 74 × 16 × 93 mm (W × H × D)
(3 × 21/32 × 3 3/4 inches)
Mass
Approx. 170 g (6.0 oz)
Power
Plug in power
Cable length 8 m (26.2 ft)
PCSA-A3 Microphone
(Optional)
Bandwidth
13 kHz
Directional characteristic
Unidirectional
Dimensions 68 × 16 × 96 mm (W × H × D)
(2 3/4 × 21/32 × 3 7/8 inches)
Mass
Approx. 200 g (7.1 oz)
Power
Plug in power
Cable length 8 m (26.2 ft)
PCSA-B384S ISDN Unit
(Optional)
PCSA-B768S ISDN Unit
(Optional)
Power requirements
DC 19.5 V
Current consumption
0.5 A
Operating temperature
5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C
(–4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D)
(6 5/8 × 1 3/8 × 5 1/8 inches)
(not including projections
except for the feet)
Mass
Approx. 400 g (14 oz)
Supplied accessories
Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Warranty booklet (1)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Specifications
229
Appendix
Power requirements
DC 19.5 V
Current consumption
0.3 A
Operating temperature
5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)
Operating humidity
20% to 80%
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C
(–4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage humidity
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Dimensions 166 × 34 × 128 mm (W × H × D)
(6 5/8 × 1 3/8 × 5 1/8 inches)
(not including projections
except for the feet)
Mass
Approx. 400 g (14 oz)
Supplied accessories
Interface cable (5 m) (16.4 ft) (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Warranty booklet (1)
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that
it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR
PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR
AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
Sales and distribution of MPEG-4
Visual encoders/decoders
Sales and distribution of MPEG-4
AVC (3-1) encoders/decoders
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER
THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT
PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER
THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE
FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER TO
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL
STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/
OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA
TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND
COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING
MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MPEG LA is offering licenses for
(i) manufacturing/sales of any storage media
storing MPEG-4 Visual video information
(ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4
Visual video information in any manner
(such as online video distribution service,
internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting).
Other usage of this product may be required to
obtain license from MPEG LA.
Please contact MPEG LA for any further
information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE
STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206,
http://www.mpegla.com
230
Specifications
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER
USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY
BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM
Acceptable RGB Input/Output Signals
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System (RGB OUT)
Picture element Signal format
fH (kHz)
fV (Hz)
Sync
1024 × 768
XGA VESA 60 Hz
48.363
60.004 H-neg
V-neg
1280 × 1024
SXGA VESA 60 Hz
63.981
60.02 H-pos
V-neg
1280 × 768
WXGA VESA 60
Hz
47.776
59.870 H-neg
V-pos
PCS-XL55 HD Visual Communication System (RGB IN)
Acceptable signals during presentation mode
Signal format
640 × 480
VGA mode 3
31.469
59.94 H-neg
V-neg
VGA VESA 72 Hz
37.861
72.809 H-neg
V-neg
VGA VESA 75 Hz
37.5
75 H-neg
V-neg
800 × 600
1024 × 768
1280 × 1024
fH (kHz)
fV (Hz)
Appendix
Picture
element
Sync
VGA VESA 85 Hz
43.269
85.008 H-neg
V-neg
SVGA VESA 56 Hz
35.156
56.25 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 60 Hz
37.879
60.317 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 72 Hz
48.077
72.188 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 75 Hz
46.875
75 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 85 Hz
53.674
85.061 H-pos
V-pos
XGA VESA 60 Hz
48.363
60.004 H-neg
V-neg
XGA VESA 70 Hz
56.476
70.069 H-neg
V-neg
XGA VESA 75 Hz
60.023
75.029 H-pos
V-pos
XGA VESA 85 Hz
68.667
84.997 H-pos
V-pos
SXGA VESA 60 Hz
63.981
60.02 H-pos
V-pos
Specifications
231
Acceptable signals during computer display
Picture
element
Signal format
640 × 350
VGA-1
31.469
70.086 H-pos
V-neg
VESA 85
37.861
85.080 H-pos
V-neg
640 × 400
640 × 480
800 × 600
fH (kHz)
fV (Hz)
Sync
NEC PC98
24.823
56.416 H-neg
V-neg
VGA-2
31.469
70.086 H-neg
V-pos
VESA 85
37.861
85.080 H-neg
V-pos
VGA mode 3
31.469
59.94 H-neg
V-neg
VGA VESA 72 Hz
37.861
72.809 H-neg
V-neg
VGA VESA 75 Hz
37.5
75 H-neg
V-neg
VGA VESA 85 Hz
43.269
85.008 H-neg
V-neg
Mac 13
35.000
66.667 H-neg
V-neg
SVGA VESA 56 Hz
35.156
56.25 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 60 Hz
37.879
60.317 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 72 Hz
48.077
72.188 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 75 Hz
46.875
75 H-pos
V-pos
SVGA VESA 85 Hz
53.674
85.061 H-pos
V-pos
832 × 624
Mac 16
49.724
74.550 H-neg
V-neg
1024 × 768
XGA VESA 60 Hz
48.363
60.004 H-neg
V-neg
XGA VESA 70 Hz
56.476
70.069 H-neg
V-neg
XGA VESA 75 Hz
60.023
75.029 H-pos
V-pos
XGA VESA 85 Hz
68.667
84.997 H-pos
V-pos
1280 × 768
1280 × 768/60
47.776
59.870 H-neg
V-pos
1280 × 720
1280 × 720/60
44.772
59.855 H-neg
V-pos
1280 × 1024
SXGA VESA 60 Hz
63.981
60.02 H-pos
V-pos
232
Specifications
Pin Assignments
RGB OUT/IN connector
5
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T jack
1
8
1
10
6
15
11
Mini D-sub 15-pin (female)
Modular jack
Pin
Signal
Description
1
RED
R (red)
Signal
Description
2
GREEN
G (green)
1
TPOPTX+
Transmit+
3
BLUE
B (blue)
2
TPONTX–
Transmit–
4
NC
–
3
TPIPRX+
Receive+
5
GND
Ground
4
NC
—
6
RED.GND
R (red) signal ground
5
NC
—
7
6
TPINRX–
Receive–
GREEN.GND G (green) signal
ground
7
NC
—
8
BLUE.GND
8
NC
—
9
NC
–
10
SYNC.GND
Sync signal ground
11
NC
–
12
NC
–
13
HSYNC
Horizontal sync
14
VSYNC
Vertical sync
15
NC
–
ISDN UNIT connector
2
1
14
13
Pin
Signal
Description
1
GND
Ground
2
19.5V
19.5V
3
DCLK+
Clock+
4
DCLK–
Clock–
5
DR+
Receive data+
6
DR–
Receive data–
7
FS+
Frame sync+
8
FS–
Frame sync–
9
DX+
Transmit data+
10
DX–
Transmit data–
11
RX
Serial receive data
12
TX
Serial transmit data
13
19.5V
19.5V
14
GND
Ground
B (blue) signal
ground
Specifications
233
Appendix
Pin
Pin Assignments on Optional
Board Connectors
ISDN 1-3 jacks (PCSA-B384S)
ISDN 1-6 jacks (PCSA-B768S)
1
8
Modular jack
Pin
Signal
Description
1
NC
–
2
NC
–
3
TA
Transmit+
4
RA
Receive+
5
RB
Receive–
6
TB
Transmit–
7
NC
–
8
NC
–
TERMINAL connector
(PCSA-B384S/PCSA-B768S)
2
14
1
13
Pin Signal
Description
1
GND
Chassis ground
2
19.5V
19.5V
3
DCLK+
Clock+
4
DCLK–
Clock–
5
DR+
Transmit data+
6
DR–
Transmit data–
7
FS+
Frame sync+
8
FS–
Frame sync–
9
DX+
Receive data+
10
DX–
Receive data–
11
TX
Serial transmit data
12
RX
Serial receive data
234
Specifications
Pin Signal
Description
13
19.5V
19.5V
14
GND
Ground
Screen Size during Two-Picture Display
Output screen size
Type
5:4
960
768
5:3
960
576
8:5
960
600
640:350
960
525
16:9
960
540
16:9
960
540
16:9
960
540
16:9
960
540
16:9
960
540
16:9
960
540
16:9
960
540
Type
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Sub picture
Aspect
Horizontal Vertical
ratio
size
size
16:9
320
180
16:9
320
180
16:9
320
180
16:9
320
180
16:9
320
180
16:9
320
180
4:3
320
240
5:4
320
256
5:3
320
192
8:5
320
200
640:350
320
175
16:9
320
180
Appendix
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Computer
display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Videoconference display
Main picture
Aspect
Horizontal Vertical
ratio
size
size
4:3
960
720
Two-Picture Display Example
24
Videoconference
display
180
320
Computer display
720
26
25
578
960
25
24
Gray frame (window picture frame): 5 dots for top, bottom, left, and right
Specifications
235
Display Switching Controls
This section describes how to transition between screen layouts.
The explanation for the videoconference screen uses the Full screen and
Picture-and-Picture layouts as an example. This explanation for the
Picture-and-Picture display can also be applied to the Side-by-Side and
Picture-in-Picture layouts.
Screen displays are represented as follows in this explanation.
= Local camera image
= Remote camera image
= Presentation from remote site
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
B
a
C
b
12
4
5
6
69
44
46
67
12
16
7
76
23
45
26
57
23
15
= Computer display
Layout Controls during Videoconference Display
Use the LAYOUT, F1, and F2 buttons on the Remote Commander to perform
layout controls. Transitions between layouts will differ depending on whether
a second monitor is used and whether presentation mode is in progress.
236
Display Switching Controls
Single monitor transitions
During communications
F1
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
F1
Appendix
During presentations
F2
F1
Transition using
the LAYOUT
button.
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
F1
F2
F2
F1
Display Switching Controls
237
Dual monitor transitions
During communications
System monitor
External monitor
F1
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
F1
During presentations
System monitor
External monitor
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
Transition using the
LAYOUT button.
F1
238
Display Switching Controls
Layout Controls between Videoconference and Computer Picture
Displays
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
VC
A
a
b
C
46
67
12
16
7
76
23
45
26
57
23
15
b
VC
VC
B
12
4
5
6
69
44
B
12
4
5
6
69
44
PC/RGB
PC/RGB
C
46
67
12
16
7
76
23
45
26
57
23
15
PC/RGB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A
a
B
12
4
5
6
69
44
b
46
67
12
16
7
76
Note
The actual position of the remote camera image in the above diagram is as follows.
• During single monitor display: The display is based on the layout settings configured
for videoconferences.
• During dual monitor display: The display is identical to the videoconference layout
displayed on the monitor of the system.
Layout Control Examples
To view the computer picture and remote camera images on a single
monitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A
a
B
12
4
5
6
69
44
b
46
67
12
16
7
76
Press the PC/RGB button on the Communication System twice during
communication with the remote party, and the monitor will switch to a
two-picture display with the computer picture as the main picture.
Display Switching Controls
239
Appendix
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
a
To view the computer picture, remote camera images, and a remote
presentation on dual monitors
System monitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A
a
External monitor
B
12
4
5
6
69
44
b
46
67
12
16
7
76
Press the PC/RGB button on the Communication System twice while receiving
a presentation from the remote party, and the monitor will switch to a
two-picture display with the computer picture as the main picture.
To view the computer picture, local camera images, and remote camera
images on dual monitors
System monitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
240
A
a
External monitor
B
12
4
5
6
69
44
b
46
67
12
16
7
76
1
Press the LAYOUT button on the Remote Commander during
communication with the remote party.
The layout menu appears.
2
Press the F1 button.
The displays of the two monitors switch, with the monitor displaying the
local camera image now displaying the remote camera image and vice
versa.
3
Press the PC/RGB button on the Communication System.
The monitor will switch to a two-picture display with the computer picture
as the main picture.
Display Switching Controls
List of Port Numbers Used on the
PCS-XL55
For point-to-point connection
Port number
1719
224.0.1.41:1718
2253-2263
1720
2253-2263
49152-49159
49152-49159
49152-49159
49152-49159
49152-49159
49152-49159
5060
51234-51235
Type
UDP
UDP Multicast
TCP
TCP
TCP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP/TCP
UDP/TCP
Appendix
Signal
RAS
Gatekeeper Discovery
Q.931 (dial)
Q.931 (answer)
H.245
Audio RTP
Audio RTCP
Video RTP
Video RTCP
FECC RTP
FECC RTCP
SIP
Auto bandwidth detection
For multipoint connection
Signal
Port number of the
first point
RAS
1719
Gatekeeper Discovery 224.0.1.41:1718
Q.931 (dial)
2253-2263
Q.931 (answer)
1720
H.245
2253-2263
Audio RTP
Audio RTCP
Video RTP
49152-49159
Video RTCP
FECC RTP
FECC RTCP
SIP
5060
Auto bandwidth
51234-51235
detection
Port numbers of the second point Type
UDP
UDP Multicast
TCP
TCP
TCP
49172-49179
UDP
UDP/TCP
UDP/TCP
Note
The port numbers for RTCP that can be set are 49152 to 65535.
List of Port Numbers Used on the PCS-XL55
241
Videoconferencing
Room Layout
Layout example
1.5 m
(4.92 ft)
0.75 m
(2.46 ft)
80°
Layout Considerations
• Avoid having large, moving objects,
especially people, behind the participants,
as the quality of the picture transmitted to
the remote party will deteriorate.
• Do not seat participants in front of a wall
with fine stripe patterns.
• Choose a room where echo will not occur.
• Do not install the system near noise
sources such as air conditioners or copy
machines.
• Avoid placing the system in a room where
there are the speakers used for an in-house
broadcasting system.
2.5 m (8.20 ft)
Lighting Considerations
Camera Range
represents the shooting area of the
camera when the zoom has been extended
fully. Use the measurements below as a
guide for the layout of your videoconference
room.
Do not point the camera toward a window
where sunlight comes in as back lighting
may decrease the contrast. If it is necessary,
cover the window with a thick curtain.
Top view (horizontal range at
maximum zoom-out)
0.75 m
(2.46 ft)
2.5 m
(8.20 ft)
80°
4.2 m (13.78 ft)
Side view (vertical range at maximum
zoom-out)
3m
(9.84 ft)
62°
2.5 m (8.20 ft)
242
Videoconferencing Room Layout
Adjust room lighting so that it falls on the
participants. Avoid direct light on the
display.
Light intensity on faces should be about 300
lux or more.
“Memory Stick”
Media
Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or “Memory
Stick PRO Duo” for the Visual
Communication System.
Notes on using “Memory Stick”
media
• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure
prevention switch to “LOCK”, data cannot
be recorded, edited, or deleted.
Terminal
Label area
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The position and shape of the write-protect
switch may differ between the various
types of “Memory Stick”.
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while
it is reading or writing data.
Data may be damaged if:
–The “Memory Stick” is removed or the
unit is turned off while reading or
writing.
–You use the “Memory Stick” in a
location subject to the effects of static
electricity or electric noise.
We recommend that you back up
important data recorded on the “Memory
Stick”.
Do not affix anything other than the
supplied label to the “Memory Stick” label
area.
Affix the label so that it does not stick out
beyond the label area.
When storing or carrying a “Memory
Stick”, keep it in its original case.
Do not touch the terminal of the “Memory
Stick” with anything, including your
fingers or metallic objects.
Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory
Stick”.
Do not disassemble or modify the
“Memory Stick”.
About data
• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure
prevention switch to “LOCK”, data such
as images and mails cannot be recorded,
edited, or deleted. Be sure to unlock the
switch before transferring or copying data
on the unit to the “Memory Stick”, or
erasing data on the “Memory Stick”.
• We recommend that you make a backup
copy of important data on another
“Memory Stick” or on a hard disk using a
computer.
Notes on using “Memory Stick
Duo”
• Use a pointed object, such as a ballpoint
pen, to move the “Memory Stick Duo”
write-protect switch.
• Do not write forcefully on the “Memory
Stick Duo” memo area.
Terminal
Write-protect
switch
Memo area
Format that can be used with this
unit
The unit can use the picture files recorded on
a “Memory Stick” in the following format:
• Image files (DCF-compatible)
compressed in the JPEG (Joint
Photographic Experts Group) format
(extension: .jpg)
“Memory Stick” Media
243
Appendix
Erasure
prevention
switch
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get
wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in
locations subject to:
–Extreme heat, such as in a closed car
parked in the sun.
–Direct sunlight.
–Humidity or corrosive substances.
Memory StickTM, Memory Stick DuoTM,
Memory Stick PROTM, Memory Stick
are trademarks of
PRO DuoTM and
Sony Corporation.
Phenomena Specific
to CMOS Image
Sensors
The following phenomena that may appear
in images are specific to CMOS
(Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor) image sensors. They do not
indicate malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CMOS image sensors are
produced with high-precision technologies,
fine white flecks may be generated on the
screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays,
etc.
This is related to the principle of CMOS
image sensors and is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen
in the following cases:
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the gain (sensitivity)
This phenomenon may be improved when
you turn the power of the System off and on.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot,
they may appear jagged or flicker.
244
Phenomena Specific to CMOS Image Sensors
Glossary
ARC
An abbreviation for Adaptive Rate Control.
Technology which automatically lowers a
video streaming bitrate against network
congestion.
ARQ
An abbreviation for Automatic Repeat
reQuest. Error control method in which the
receiver requests a retransmission from the
transmitter when a packet loss occurs.
Bonding*
Bonding is one of the Inverse Multiplexing
methods allowing the connection of the
communication system with multiple ISDN
lines. Dialing the first ISDN line enables you
to connect all other lines. Dialing the second
and later lines is done automatically by the
communication between the communication
systems on both sites. To use bonding, it is
required that both communication systems
be equipped with the bonding function and
that “Area Code” and “Local Number” in the
ISDN Setup menu of the answering site be
set correctly. As the communication
between the systems when using the
bonding function is made via the ISDN
numbers of the answering site, the “Area
Code” and “Local Number” settings in the
ISDN Setup menu are not essential at the
dialing site.
* Bonding (Bandwidth on Demand
Interoperability Group) is a registered
trademark of THE BONDING
CONSORTIUM.
BRI
An abbreviation for Basic Rate Interface.
Basic interface standardized by the ITU-T.
Single ISDN has two B channels and one D
channel.
DHCP
An abbreviation for Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol. Manages IP
addresses in the network.
DNS
An abbreviation for Domain Name System.
Defines the domain name system.
Echo Canceller
Device to eliminate echo that occurs when
transmitting audio.
FEC
An abbreviation for Forward Error
Correction. Error control method in which
the receiver can correct errors without
requesting a retransmission from the
transmitter.
Frame rate
The number of frames which can be
encoded/decoded in one second.
G.711
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 64 Kbps. It
can be transmitted with a data rate of 56
Kbps.
G.722
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A 7-kHz
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 48 Kbps, 56
Kbps or 64 Kbps.
G.728
Audio encoding/decoding format
recommended by the ITU-T. A phone
bandwidth audio signal is converted to a
digital signal with a data rate of 16 Kbps.
Glossary
245
Appendix
Auto Bandwidth Detection
Detects the network bandwidth and others
before communication. By using this value
for the QoS function, optimum QoS control
is available from the beginning of the
communication.
Codec
An abbreviation for Coder-Decoder. An
integrated device of a coder that converts an
analog audio/video signal to a digital data
stream and compresses it, and a decoder for
expanding to restore the original analog
signal.
Gatekeeper
Controls the access of H.323
communication devices on a network.
Administers the zone, access limitation,
audio/video bandwidth, and alias etc.
H.221
Frame structure for a digital channel in
audiovisual teleservices.
H.323
This enables communications on the
non-Qos (Quality of Service) LAN.
HD
An abbreviation for High Definition. High
Definition television provides a
high-resolution and high-quality picture.
There are 1080i and 720P HD formats.
H.239
ITU-T standard for sharing data and
presentations with video. This supports the
dual video presentation mode, enabling
endpoints to receive and transmit video and
presentation data simultaneously.
HMLP
See “MLP”.
H.261
Video codec for audio/visual services as p ×
64 Kbps. A standard that defines a video
coding algorithm, picture format and error
correcting technology for communication
between different manufacturers’ video
codecs.
I-MUX
An abbreviation for Inverse Multiplexer.
This protocol allows you to transmit the data
at 384 Kbps via 6B-channel.
H.263
A video coding algorithm based on the
H.261 standard. This format enables
communication via a lower bit rate.
H.263+
Video encoding/decoding format based on
the H.263 standard, added by the Annex I to
T (I, J, K …… T), that allows enhanced
picture quality and error resistance.
Normally, this format is a profile used with
a combination of some of the Annex for
H.263/H.263+.
H.264
A video coding algorithm standardized by
the ITU-T in May 2003. This format realizes
high-quality picture via a lower bit rate. It
provides an equal picture quality via half as
low bit rate as the H.263 format. The H.264
format is also called as MPEG4 Advanced
Video Coding (AVC).
H.320
A standard for communication between
different communication systems.
246
Glossary
HOP
Number of routers that have passed through
to reach the remote party.
ISDN
An abbreviation for Integrated Services
Digital Network. This is a communication
protocol by CCITT on transmission of
integrated voice, video, and data.
Bandwidths include basic (64 Kbps) and
primary rate (1.544 and 2.048 Mbps).
ITU-T
An abbreviation for International
Telecommunication Union,
Telecommunications.
Lip synchronization
A function that synchronizes sound with
motion. Sound processing is much faster
than motion processing, thus sound and
motion sometimes get out of step with each
other.
MLP
Data communication is also available during
communication of video/audio signals
between the communication systems. The
MLP or HMLP is a protocol for data
communication such as NetMeeting. Using
the HMLP protocol allows faster data
transmission.
NTSC
An abbreviation for National TV Standards
Committee. NTSC is the television system
in use in Japan, the United States, etc.
It is not compatible with the PAL system.
PAL
An abbreviation for Phase Alternation Line.
PAL is the television system in use in
Europe, China, etc.
It is not compatible with the NTSC system.
TOS
Inputting the information data in the TOS
field of the IP address allows the
communication system to judge the packet
transmission priority, etc. It also enables
change of path according to the types of
service (Delay or Size).
P in P
An abbreviation for “Picture in Picture.”
This is a function which allows you to
monitor your own party on a small window
on your TV monitor.
Appendix
QoS
An abbreviation for Quality of Service. QoS
reserves a bandwidth for specific
communication in the network and
guarantees a given communication speed.
SIP
An acronym for Session Initiation Protocol.
SIP is a communication control protocol
used for Internet telephony, instant
messaging, etc.
SNMP
An abbreviation for Simple Network
Management Protocol. This protocol is for
management information between the
management station and the managed
terminals. This enables the monitoring of
Sony Communication Systems.
SPID
An abbreviation for Service Profile ID.
Streaming
A technology that allows audio and video
data to be played back as it is downloaded
for real time viewing over a network, such as
the Internet.
Sub-address
An identification number given to devices
sharing a common ISDN line.
Glossary
247
Menu Configuration
The menus of the HD Visual Communication System are configured as
described below.
For detailed information, see pages in parentheses. The initial settings of each
item are bolded.
Home
Camera
(page 42) (page 125)
Adjustments
Brightness
Preset
Details
Tools
(page 139)
Camera Angle
Manual Adjustment
Preset Setting List
New Entry
Preset Number, Camera
Angle, Thumbnails
Backlight
On, Off
White Balance
Auto, Indoor, Outdoor,
ONE PUSH
Focus
Auto, Manual
Focus Adjustment
Presentation
Execute, Stop
Streaming
Execute, Stop
(page 141)
(page 144)
Recording
Execute, Stop
(page 146)
Annotation
Icon Display
Execute
Stop
On, Off
Reject Answer
On, Off
Screen Capture
Execute
(page 149)
Background Screen,
Annotation Mode, Start
(page 137)
Machine Status
(page 83)
Setup
(page 54)
Continued on next page
248
Menu Configuration
Machine Information
Peripheral Status
Communication Mode Status
LAN Line Status
Network Routing Check
Line I/F
A
Dial
B
Answer
C
Multipoint
D
Communication
E
Audio
F
Video
G
LAN
H
QoS
I
TOS
J
SIP
K
Continued on next page
ISDN
Annotation
Camera
General
Home Menu
Administrator
Encryption
Shared Phone Book
History
(page 102)
Phone Book/
Private Phone
Book
Dial, Answer, Missed Call
Phone Book
Detailed Dial
Phone Book List
New Entry
“Phone Book”
“Detailed Dial”
Group Edit
History
Detailed Dial
“History”
“Detailed Dial”
F1, F2, F3, F4
(page 101)
Direct Dial
Line interface
IP, ISDN, TEL, SIP
IP address, Telephone number
Dial
Connect
(page 99)
Enter Number/Address
Select from Phone Book
Select from History
“Detailed Dial”
“Phone Book”
“History”
Detailed Dial
Detailed Dial
Dial to:, Line I/F, Communication Bit Rate,
Number of Lines
“Phone Book”
“History”
“List Edit”
(page 100)
(page 105)
Phone Book
History
More Options Enable
A Line I/F
Line Interface
IP, ISDN, SIP
Primary Line Interface
IP, ISDN, SIP
(page 57)
Menu Configuration
249
Appendix
Index, Group Select, Dial to:, Auto Dial, Image,
One-Touch Dial Specified, Line I/F, Communication
Bit Rate, Number of Lines, More Options “More
Options”
(page 112)
One-Touch Dial
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
B Dial
(page 57)
C Answer
(page 58)
D Multipoint
Telephone Mode
More Options Enable
User Name Input
Prefix
Prefix-A
Prefix-B
Prefix-C
Select LAN Prefix
LAN Prefix
Auto, G.711 -law, G711A-law
Off, On
Off, On
Prefix-None, Prefix-A, Prefix-B, Prefix-C
Auto Answer
ISDN MSN
Mic on Answer
Reject Answer
On, Off
Off, On
On, Off
On, Off
Disable, Enable
Mlutipoint Mode
AUTO, On
Broadcast Mode
Split, Voice Activate, Voice Activate (720P)
Split
Four-screen Mosaic, Six-screen Mosaic
(page 58)
250
Menu Configuration
E Communication
(page 59)
IP
(Communication)
IP:Mode
4)
(Communication)
Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception
Individual Settings for
Point-to-Point/Multipoint
Off, On
Total Bandwidth
128Kbps, 384Kbps,
512Kbps, 768Kbps,
1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps,
4Mbps, Other
128Kbps, 384Kbps,
512Kbps, 768Kbps,
1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps,
4Mbps, Other
G.711, G.722, G.728,
MPEG4
On, Off
On, Off
2/3, 1/2, 1/3
720, W4CIF, W432P,
WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF,
AUTO
H.261, H.263+, H.264
15fps, 30fps, 60fps, AUTO
Communication Bit Rate1)
Audio Mode1)
Video Mode1)
1)
Video Frame
ISDN
Individual Settings for
Point-to-Point/Multipoint
ISDN:Mode
4)
(Communication)
ISDN Bandwidth (Dial)
3)
ISDN Bandwidth
(Answer)3)
Audio Mode3)
Far End Camera Control3)
H.239
H.239 Ratio
Restrict
Screen Size3)
Video Mode3)
3)
Video Frame
Off, On
1B(64K), 2B(128K),
3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K),
8B(512K), 12B(768K)
1B(64K), 2B(128K),
3B(192K), 4B(256K),
5B(320K), 6B(384K),
8B(512K), 12B(768K)
G.711, G.722, G.728,
MPEG4
On, Off
On, Off
2/3, 1/2, 1/3
Auto, 56K
W4CIF, W432P, WCIF,
4CIF, CIF, AUTO
H.261, H.263+, H.264
15fps, 30fps, AUTO
Continued on next page
Menu Configuration
251
Appendix
Far End Camera Control2)
H.239
H.239 Ratio
Screen Size1)
Off, On
SIP:Mode
(Communication)4)
Communication Bit Rate
Audio Mode
Far End Camera Control
Screen Size
Video Mode
Video Frame
128Kbps, 384Kbps,
512Kbps, 768Kbps,
1Mbps, 2Mbps, 3Mbps,
4Mbps, Other
G.728, G.722, G.711
On, Off
720, W4CIF, W432P,
WCIF, 4CIF, CIF, QCIF,
AUTO
H.261, H.263+, H.264,
MPEG4
15fps, 30fps, 60fps, AUTO
1) When “Individual Settings for Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/
Multipoint” is set to “On” on the IP page, the item is set up for transmission, reception, point-to-point
and multipoint individually.
2) When “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” is set to “On” on the IP page, the item is
set up for point-to-point and multipoint individually.
3) When “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint” is set to “On” on the ISDN page, the item
is set up for point-to-point and multipoint individually.
4) The page number after “Communication2” varies with the on/off setting in “Individual Settings for
Transmission/Reception” or “Individual Settings for Point-to-Point/Multipoint”.
252
Menu Configuration
F Audio
(page 62)
Basic Setup1
(Audio1)
Audio Input
Input Select (MIC)/
Input Select (AUX)
Echo Canceller
Lip Sync
Recording Mute
Input Mode
Output Mode
MIC, AUX, MIC+AUX
MIC(A1/A3), MIC (Camera),
AUDIO
On, Off
Auto, Off
Off, On
Stereo, Monaural
Stereo, Monaural
Basic Setup2
(Audio2)
AUX Local Monitor Out
Reversed MIC Inputs
Audio Input Delay Setting
On, Off
Off, On
Default–100ms, Default–50ms,
Default, Default+50ms,
Default+100ms, Custom
Audio Input Delay
Audio Output Delay Setting
G Video
(page 65)
Audio Output Delay
REC OUT Mode
Lens Cover Mic On/Off
Function
Stereo, Monaural 2ch
On, Off
Beep Sound
Sound Effect
Dial Tone
Ringer Tone
Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off
Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off
Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off
Loud, Medium, Quiet, Off
Basic Setup
(Video1)
Video Input
Presentation Screen
Monitor Output
RGB Monitor Output Format
Blanking Period
Custom Input
Label
(Video2)
Link to Mic
(Video3)
Custom Input Label (Camera)
Custom Input Label (RGB)
Link to Audio Input
Video Input
Audio Input
Input Select (MIC)/
Input Select (AUX)
Appendix
Sound Effect
(Audio3)
Default–100ms, Default–50ms,
Default, Default+50ms,
Default+100ms, Custom
Camera, RGB
Full Screen, PandP, Side by Side
Single, Dual
SXGA, XGA, WXGA
Long, Medium, Short
Off, On
Camera, RGB
MIC, AUX, MIC+AUX
MIC(A1/A3), MIC (Camera),
AUDIO
Menu Configuration
253
H LAN
(page 66)
254
Basic Setup
(LAN)
Host Name
DHCP Mode
Prefix Length
IP Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
LAN Mode
Auto, Off
Auto, 100Mbps Full Duplex, 100Mbps
Half Duplex, 10Mbps Full Duplex,
10Mbps Half Duplex
PPPoE
(LAN)
PPPoE
Off, On
User Alias
Password
Fixed IP for PPPoE
Off, On
Fixed IP Address for PPPoE
DNS
Obtain automatically, Specify
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
NAT Setup
(LAN)
NAT Mode
WAN IP Address
Auto, On, Off
Gatekeeper
(LAN)
Gatekeeper Mode
Gatekeeper Address
User Alias
User Number
H.460
Auto, On, Off
Used Port
Number,
RTP/RTCP Setup
(LAN)
Q.931
H.245
RTP/RTCP
MTU Size
SNMP
(LAN)
SNMP Mode
Trap Destination
Community
Description
Location
Menu Configuration
On, Off
On, Off
I QoS
(page 69)
Basic Setup
(QoS1)
Re-Order/Shaping
(QoS2)
K SIP
(page 71)
On, Off
On, Off
Re-Order
Re-Order Buffer
Re-Order Buffer Rate
Shaping
On, Off
Auto, 1, 2, Custom
TOS Data Type
TOS
Precedence
Low Delay
High Throughput
High Reliability
Minimum Cost
DSCP
Basic Setup
(SIP)
On, Off
300ms, 150ms, 80ms, Auto, Custom
On, Off
8, 4, 2, Auto
On, Off
On, Off
Appendix
J TOS
(page 70)
Adaptive Rate Control (ARC)
Auto Bandwidth Detection
TCP Port Number
UDP Port Number
Packet Resend Request(ARQ)
ARQ Buffering Time
ARQ Buffering Time
Forward Error Correction(FEC)
FEC Redundancy
Audio Duplex Transmission
Video, Audio, Data, Presentation
Off, IP Precedence, DSCP
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
SIP Server Mode
Transport Protocol
Port Number
SIP Domain
Registered User Name
Password
SIP Server Address
SIP Server Port
On, Off
TCP, UDP
Menu Configuration
255
L ISDN
Basic Setup
Country/Region
Country/region selectable
Protocol
Japan(NTT), National ISDN, Euro ISDN,
Euro ISDN(France), 5ESS(P-MP),
5ESS(P-P), DMS-100
(page 71) (ISDN1)
Telephone Number
(ISDN2)
Area Code (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2)
Local Number (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2)
Telephone Number
(ISDN3)
Area Code (D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2)
Local Number (D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2)
Sub Address
(ISDN4)
Sub Address (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2)
SPID
(ISDN5)
SPID (A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2, Auto SPID)
M Annotation
(page 73)
Enable
Color
Line Density
N Camera
(page 74)
256
Menu Configuration
On, Off
Black, Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Orange,
Purple, White
Thick, Medium, Thin
O General
(page 74)
Device Setup
(General1)
Terminal Name
Standby Mode
Standby Time
Last Number Registration
Control by Far End
Language
Clock Set
(General2)
NTP
Primary NTP Server
Secondary NTP Server
Time Zone
Clock Display Pattern
Menu Screens
(General3)
Display Time in
Communication
Display Terminal Name
Guide
Display Indicator
Communication Mode
Display
Display On-Screen
Keyboard
Menu Transparency
On, Off
Year/Month/Day, Month/Day/Year,
Day/Month/Year, Year-Month-Day,
Day.Month.Year
Appendix
Date
Time
Time Update
On, Off
1-99 minutes
Off, On
On, Off
Japanese, English, French, German,
Spanish, Italian, Simplified Chinese,
Portuguese, Traditional Chinese, Korean,
Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish,
Russian, Arabic, Thai, Norwegian, Turkish,
Welsh, Czech, Hungarian
Execute
Off, Time Display, Current Time
Off, Always Show, Show Temporarily
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
High, Medium, Low
Continued on next page
Menu Configuration
257
Function Keys
F1
in Communication F2
(General4)
F3
F4
P Home Menu
(page 76)
258
Home Menu1
(Home Menu1)
Far/Near, Camera, RGB, No Operation
Camera, , RGB, No Operation
Camera, RGB, Zoom (RGB), No Operation
Camera, RGB, No Operation
Terminal Status
Warning Messages
On, Off
On, Off
IP:Address, SIP:User Name, SIP:Address,
GK:User Alias, GK:User Number,
NAT:Address, No Display
On, Off
On, Off
Home Menu2
(Home Menu2)
Connect Button Display
Phone Book Button
History Button
Detailed Dial Button
Camera Button
Tools Button
One-Touch Dial
Direct Dial
Simple, Individual, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
Off, On
On, Off
Off, On
Home Menu3
(Home Menu3)
Video Input Display
Audio Input Display
Audio Level Meter
Volume
LAN Status
ISDN Status
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
Menu Configuration
Clock Display
Local Terminal Name
Number Display
Q Administrator
(page 77)
Administrator Password
Phone Book Modification Password
Save Settings Password
Remote Access Password
Streaming Broadcast Password
Setup Password1
(Administrator2)
Line I/F
Dial
Answer
Multipoint
IP Mode
SIP Mode
ISDN Mode
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Setup Password2
(Administrator3)
Audio
Video
LAN
QoS
TOS
SIP
ISDN
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Setup Password3
(Administrator4)
General
Home Menu
Administrator
Annotation
Camera
Encryption
Shared Phone Book
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Streaming/Recording
(Administrator5)
Streaming
Recording
Video
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Off, 64Kbps, 128Kbps,
384Kbps, 512Kbps
Appendix
Password
(Administrator1)
Multicast Address
Audio Port Number
Video Port Number
HOP
Access Permit1)
(Administrator6)
Web Monitor
Web Access
Telnet Access
SSH Access
On, Off
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
Continued on next page
1) The items on the Access Permit page are displayed and can be set only when
“Internet Protocol” is set to “IPv4”.
Menu Configuration
259
Other
(Administrator7)
Phone Book
(Administrator8)
R Encryption
Use History
Save Setup
Load Setup
AMX Device Discovery
HOP
Auto Restore
Internet Protocol
On, Off
Execute
Execute
Off, On
Save Phone Book
Load Phone Book
Clear Phone Book
Auto Dialing
Create Private Phone Book
Delete Private Phone Book
Copy to Private Phone Book
Execute
Execute
Execute
On, Off
Execute
Execute
Execute
Encryption Mode
On, Off
IPv4, IPv6, IPv4/IPv6
Off, Connect Priority, Encrypt Priority
(page 82)
S Shared Phone Book
(page 82)
SPB Mode
SPB Server Address
SPB Server Password
On, Off
Computer display function menu
menu
Picture
(page 197)
Screen
Setup
Information
260
Menu Configuration
Picture Mode
Reset
Backlight
Contrast
Brightness
Color Temp.
Dynamic, Standard
Execute
Wide Mode
V Center
Adjust Signal
Full1, Full2, Zoom
Power Saving
High, Medium, Low
APA
Phase
Pitch
Shift
On, Off
Sony Corporation
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising